JP6784654B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a bullet-type pachinko gaming machine.

The pachinko game machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a production control board that controls the production of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display on the game board and the characters. Some game machines shift to a special mode such as a store setting mode by turning on the power switch while pressing the effect button. Patent Document 1 is a document that discloses a technique related to this type of gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-239952

By the way, in this kind of game machine, if the cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board is not smooth, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to facilitate cooperation between a main control board and an effect control board in a game machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention executes each lottery including a big hit lottery, controls the progress of the game based on the lottery result, and generates a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game. The main control means to be obtained, the effect means for displaying an image and outputting sound, and the command in the main control means are received, the control content of the effect means is determined based on the received command, and the effect is determined according to this determination. A gaming machine including an effect control means for controlling the means and an operation means for performing an operation related to the setting of the main control means, and each of the main control means and the effect control means is triggered by turning on the power. Independent operation is possible, and when the operation means is turned on in a predetermined state, the main control means shifts to a setting mode related to the setting related to the lottery, and the effect control means is the main control. The effect control means includes means for displaying a predetermined image on the effect means while the means is in the setting mode, and the effect control means generates a command received during the display of the predetermined image by the main control means. Provided is a game machine characterized in that the display of the predetermined image in the effect means is maintained in the case of the special game start command regardless of whether or not the command is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board and the effect control board in the game machine.

It is a front view of the game machine which is 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the state that the 1st movable accessory 330a in the game machine shown in FIG. 1 descends. It is a figure which shows the mode that the 2nd movable accessory 330b in the game machine shown in FIG. 1 tilts. It is a figure which shows the mode that the 3rd movable accessory 330c in the game machine shown in FIG. 1 opens and closes. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of a jackpot in the game machine shown in FIG. 1 and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. It is a figure which shows the mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. .. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the game machine shown in FIG. It is an assembly drawing which shows the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the main command of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change mode processing of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation mode processing of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off monitoring process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special symbol hold storage area of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 and the effect information storage area of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the pre-determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table and the ordinary symbol lottery determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game control table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing control table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting table at the end of a special game of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing control processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display image of the image display device of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display image of the image display device of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display image of the image display device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change notification image display control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display image of the image display device of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis processing during the setting change of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. This is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game command analysis processing during the setting change of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. This is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation notification image display control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display image of the image display device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a special command analysis process during confirmation of setting of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. This is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game command analysis processing during setting confirmation of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. This is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead effect effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead effect effect execution determination table and the final stage effect display mode determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the SP specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination table and the SPU specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the SPSP specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination table and SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a dialogue operation effect operation result determination process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue speaker determination table and the dialogue determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination table and the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the surprise operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the shortening variation advance notice effect execution determination table and the shortening variation advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the release notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the disengagement notice effect execution determination table and the disengagement notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the mode effect control processing of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change determination process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change execution determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the new stage determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a stage change notice effect selection process during a symbol change of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process while the symbol is stopped of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round game effect control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special training mode start control processing of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the live mode start control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the operation information storage area of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 and the update example thereof. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table of the game machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution mode of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an assembly drawing which shows the effect control board of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 7th Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. This is an example of a command execution mode determination table for a game machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the game machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the entire game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the game machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that visually covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60.

One end of the glass door 50 (on the left side facing the game machine 1) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side facing the game machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked with a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism portion 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a for detecting the opening of the glass door 50.

On the outside of the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the second special symbol hold indicator 24, and ordinary A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “starting prize”). Is. The second special symbol display device 21 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “starting prize”). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified by each. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are composed of 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately referred to as the "second special symbol". It is called "design".

The first special symbol hold indicator 23 displays the number of hold changes of the first special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 24 displays the number of pending changes in the second special symbol.

Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition that was established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol was satisfied by the start winning of the first start port 14. It occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition that was established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol was satisfied by the start winning of the second start port 15. It occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Each of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. More specifically, the display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 will be described. In the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the number of holds for changes in the first special symbol is In the case of one, the left LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is two, the LED on the right lights up. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is 3, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is 4, the two LEDs on the left and right blink. The display mode of the number of holds on the second special symbol hold indicator 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold indicator 23.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed when the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 13. The ordinary symbol display device 22 variablely displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols that can be identified from each other. The ordinary symbol hold indicator 25 displays the number of pending changes in the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold indicator 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold indicator 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24.

The game area 6 of the game machine 1 has a substantially oval shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right area 6R on the right side. At the left end of the left region 6L, rails 5a and 5b are provided between the rails 5a and 5b which extend in an arc shape with a space slightly wider than that of the game ball. Of these rails 5a and 5b, a ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b.

An effect button 35 is provided under the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by pressing. The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects that the effect button 35 has been pressed, the effect button detection switch 35a outputs an on signal indicating that fact.

A cross key 39 is provided on the left side of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

The up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The central key 39E is provided with a central key detection switch 39e. When the cross key detection switch 39a detects that the upper cursor key 39A has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39a outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39b detects that the down cursor key 39B has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39c detects that the left cursor key 39C has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39d detects that the right cursor key 39D has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the central key detection switch 39e detects that the central key 39E has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact.

A saucer for storing game balls is provided on the back side of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. An operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a firing operation, which is an operation of holding the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

A touch sensor 3a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is composed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance due to contact with the operation handle 3 of the player. A ball feed solenoid 4b is provided on the saucer of the glass door 50. The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided in the vicinity of the rotating portion of the operation handle 3. The firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

Each of these parts 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b performs an operation related to launching the game ball into the game area 6 in the saucer under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the firing volume 3b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 controls to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is being supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

By the energization control of the launch control board 160, the ball feed solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the saucer one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the launching member. The game ball sent out from the saucer toward the launching member is launched between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the launching member, and is guided by the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b passes through the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls unpredictably in the game area 6.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. As a result, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid 4a. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

A decorative member 7 that affects the flow of the game ball is provided in the upper part of the game area 6. Directing drive devices 33a and 33b are provided at the back of the decorative member 7 at the upper part of the game area 6 and at the right end of the game area 6. The effect drive devices 33a and 33b produce a game by the movement of the device itself under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect driving device 33a has an annular first movable accessory 330a and an actuator that supports the upper edge thereof. When the effect driving device 33a receives a signal instructing the driving of the first movable accessory 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33a is located at a position (position shown in FIG. 1) on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6. The first movable accessory 330a is lowered to the central position (position shown in FIG. 4) of the game area 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the effect driving device 33b has a stick-shaped second movable accessory 330b and an actuator that supports the lower end thereof. When the effect driving device 33b receives a signal instructing the driving of the second movable accessory 330b from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b moves the second movable accessory 330b from the rightmost position (position shown in FIG. 1) of the game area 6. It is tilted toward the central position (position shown in FIG. 5) of the game area 6.

A driving device 33c for effect is provided slightly inside the left and right corners of the upper part of the glass door 50 of the game machine 1. The left and right directing drive devices 33c contain three directing lighting devices (lamps) 34 each. The effect driving device 33c and the effect lighting device 34 produce a game by moving the device itself and emitting light under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the effect driving device 33c has left and right third movable accessories 330c and an actuator that supports their side ends. When the effect drive device 33c receives a signal instructing the drive of the third movable accessory 330c from the lamp control board 140, the effect drive device 33c covers the third movable accessory 330c with the effect lighting device 34 (position shown in FIG. 1). ) And the position to be exposed (the position shown in FIG. 6). Further, the effect lighting device 34 blinks when it receives a drive signal from the lamp control board 140.

An audio output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside the left and right directing drive devices 33c above the glass door 50 of the game machine 1. The audio output device 32 performs an acoustic game effect (output of various background music (BGM) and output of sound effects) under the control of the image control board 150.

A plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided below the left area 6L in the game area 6. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

A first large winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the game area 6. The first large winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The first special winning opening 16b is provided with a first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c for switching the opening / closing of the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b. .. The first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the first large winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first grand prize opening opening / closing door 16b is swingably pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first grand winning opening 16. When the first grand prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the first winning opening 16. When the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the first winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

While the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball falling from above the first large winning opening 16 passes in front of the first large winning opening 16 as it is. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the first large winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first prize opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first winning opening 16b face upward of the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the first large winning opening 16. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the first large winning opening 16.

A second big winning opening 17 is provided in the lower center of the game area 6. The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second large winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The second prize opening opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c for switching the opening / closing of the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b. .. The second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the second large winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is swingably pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second special winning opening 17. When the 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the 2nd winning opening opening / closing door 17b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the 2nd winning opening 17. When the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the second winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

While the 2nd prize opening opening / closing door 17b is closed, the game balls falling from the diagonally upper right and diagonally upper left of the 2nd prize opening 17 pass in front of the 2nd prize opening 17 as they are. To do. Therefore, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the 2nd big prize opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the 2nd big winning opening 17b face upward of the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing door 17b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the second large winning opening 17. Therefore, while the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the second large winning opening 17.

Above the second big winning opening 17 in the lower center of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged in the vertical direction. The first start port 14 is provided with a first start port detection switch 14a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the first start port 14. When the first start port detection switch 14a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

The second start port 15 is provided with a second start port detection switch 15a that detects the passage of the game ball at the second start port 15. When the second start port detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

A pair of movable pieces 15b are provided at the second starting port 15. The open / closed state of these movable pieces 15b is switched by the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c. When the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned off, each of the pair of movable pieces 15b is in an upright closed state. When the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an open state tilted in an inverted C shape. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "electric chew") as an ordinary electric accessory. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls that fall from diagonally above the left and right of the second starting port 15 toward the second starting port 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce off. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls that fall from diagonally above the left and right of the second starting port 15 toward the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. It reaches the second starting port 15. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.

A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly upward from the first large winning opening 16 in the right region 6R of the game region 6. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the normal symbol gate 13.

Here, in the game machine 1, a big hit is triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol by the starting prize of the first starting port 14, and the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol by the starting winning of the second starting port 15. When the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol stops at the symbol according to the type of jackpot after the variable display for a predetermined period, and this stop symbol indicates. A special game is executed according to the type of jackpot. In the special game, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 until the number of winnings of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. The opening of is a one-round round game, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are seven types of jackpots for the game machine 1.

a1. First 16R Probability Change This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the first large winning opening 16 is opened until the number of winnings of the first large winning opening 16 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds elapse → the first large for 2 seconds. The first large winning opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening / closing mode in which the winning opening 16 is closed.

When this jackpot is won, the gaming state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability gaming state which is advantageous to the player among the two states of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In the game machine 1, the jackpot lottery probability in the low probability gaming state is set 1 (big hit lottery winning probability is 2/599), setting 2 (big hit lottery winning probability is 2/579), and setting 3 (big hit lottery winning). Probability is 2/549), setting 4 (big hit lottery winning probability is 2/529), setting 5 (big hit lottery winning probability is 2/509), and setting 6 (big hit lottery winning probability is 2/489) You can choose from 6 levels. The jackpot lottery probability in the high probability gaming state is 20/599, which is common to all settings.

The probability in the high probability gaming state may be increased by 10 times from the low probability to the common for all settings. Specifically, setting 1 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is 20/599), setting 2 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is 20/579), and setting 3 (high probability gaming state). The winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 20/549), setting 4 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is 20/529), setting 5 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is 20/509), And setting 6 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is 20/489) may be set.

When this jackpot is won, the game state related to the ordinary electric accessory (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is changed to the electric chew support state (the movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time and the second starting port 15 is opened. Of the two states, the start winning state (a state in which it is easy to win a prize) and the non-electric chew support state (a state in which the movable piece 15b is difficult to open), the electric chew support state is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state related to the special symbol is the time. Of the two states, a shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short) and a non-time shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long), the time is shortened which is advantageous to the player. .. The state related to the ordinary electric accessory and the state related to the special symbol are subordinate to each other, and when the state related to the ordinary electric accessory becomes the electric chew support state, the state related to the special symbol becomes the time shortened state. In the following description, the state related to the normal electric accessory is the electric chew support state, and the state related to the special symbol is the time shortened state is called the "time saving game state", and the state related to the ordinary electric accessory is not. The state in which the electric chew support state and the state related to the special symbol is the non-time shortening state is called the "non-time saving game state".

In the game machine 1, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 1/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 29 seconds, and the second starting port 15 for each winning of the normal symbol lottery is performed during the non-time saving game state. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

The winning probability of the normal symbol and the opening time of the movable piece 15b are common regardless of whether the jackpot lottery probability is set from setting 1 to setting 6.

When this jackpot is won, after the gaming state becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state through a special game, the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

b1. 1st 8R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the 1st special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. In the eight round games, the number of prizes in the second prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, nine) or the opening of the second prize opening 17 until 29 seconds have passed → The second prize in two seconds The second prize-winning opening 17 is opened and closed by closing the opening 17. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game will be a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The high-probability game state and the short-time game state continue until the jackpot is won again.

c1. 1st 8R Normal Hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the 1st special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second large winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again or the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 100 without winning the jackpot.

d1. 1st 2R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the 1st special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, two round games, the first round and the second round, are performed. In the two round games, the number of prizes in the second prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or the opening of the second prize opening 17 until 0.4 seconds elapses → the second for 2 seconds. The second large winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening / closing mode in which the large winning opening 17 is closed. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again. Here, the time required for the special game when this jackpot is won (total opening time of the big prize opening) is compared with the time required for the special game when another big hit is won (total opening time of the big winning opening). short. Therefore, the number of game balls won will be larger when another jackpot is won than when this jackpot is won. The first special figure 2R probability variation hit is also called a "short hit" or a "sudden hit" in the sense that it is a jackpot that enters a high probability gaming state after a short jackpot.

f1. Second 16R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the first grand prize opening 16 in the 16 round games is the same as that of the first 16R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

g1. Second 8R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second large winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

i1. Second 8R Normal Hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second large winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again or the special symbol is changed 100 times after the special game without winning the jackpot.

In addition, the number of rounds, the number of winning rules, the opening time of the big winning opening, the number of times of the time-saving game machine state, and the distribution of each big hit symbol obtained by the big hit of each special figure are set by the setting of the big hit lottery probability 1 to 6 Any of these will be common.

In the following description, the first 16R probability variation, the first 8R probability variation, the first 2R probability variation, the second 16R probability variation, and the second 8R probability variation are collectively referred to as "probability variation" as appropriate. .. Further, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as "normal hit" as appropriate. Further, the first 16R probability variation hit and the second 16R probability variation hit are collectively referred to as "per 16R probability" as appropriate. The first 8R probability variation hit, the first 8R normal hit, the second 8R probability variation hit, and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as "8R per hit" as appropriate. The first 2R probability variation hit is appropriately referred to as "2R hit".

Further, in the game machine 1, a normal symbol lottery for determining the winning or not of the winning of the normal symbol is executed when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied by passing the game ball of the normal symbol gate 13, and the winning is won in this normal symbol lottery. If so, the movable piece 15b, which is usually an electric accessory, is opened for a predetermined period of time. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied.

An out port 11 is provided in the center of the bottom of the game area 6. A game ball that has reached the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning openings 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first major winning opening 16, and the second major winning opening 17. Is discharged through the out port 11.

An image display device 31 is fitted between the decorative member 7 and the first starting port 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31 produces a game by displaying an image under the control of the image control board 150.

More specifically, the game machine 1 performs a symbol variation effect according to the symbol variation from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the symbol variation effect, the image display device 31 has the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R). , 36Z is appropriately referred to as "directing symbol 36"). The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z have the first special symbol display device 20 and the second symbol display device 20 and the second symbol due to the fluctuation synchronized with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. The same jackpot determination result as that indicated by the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, and "6" symbol. There are "7" symbols, "8" symbols, and "9" symbols. Further, the display mode of the fourth symbol 36Z includes a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 starts, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R Each is "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol → "9" symbol → "1" The first round display of the symbol is started, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts the round display of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third display mode → the first display mode. When the special symbol stops after the fluctuation display over a predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed in the combination corresponding to the stopped display special symbol ( Complete stop).

If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are a combination mode of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "winning mode") according to the stop of the special symbol. The jackpot notification effect that stops at is executed. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are lost in combination with the stop of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "missing mode"). The loss notification effect that stops at is executed. The type of jackpot notified by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect always matches the type of jackpot notified by the special symbol.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the game machine 1, when the 16R probability variation hit is won in the big hit lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display mode. It stops with the combination.

If you win the 8R probability variation in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " In any of "999", the fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the second display mode.

If the 8R normal hit is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " In any of "999", the fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the first display mode.

When the 2R probability variation is won in the big hit lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z is the first display mode.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a mode other than the above combination (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "missing mode").

Here, the display size of the fourth symbol 36Z is extremely smaller than that of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. Therefore, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are confirmed (completely stopped) by the same symbol combination other than "777" and "333", either the 8R probability variation hit or the 8R normal hit is won. I don't know what it is. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are confirmed (completely stopped) at "777" or "333", it is easy to know that the 16R probability variation has been won at the time of confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a hitting manner to perform a special game, a special game effect is produced according to the special game. Do. In the special game production, an opening production related to the opening of the special game, a round game production related to the round game, and an ending production related to the ending of the special game are performed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the image 37 (0) _{0 of the} fluctuation is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 31. If the first is pending variation of the special symbols, on the left side of the image of the variation in the image display device 31 37 (0), the image 37 of the _first hold the first special symbol (variation order is first hold) (1), image 37 ₁ (2) of the second hold (hold second in the order of change), image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (hold third in the order of change), and fourth hold (change) sequentially up to four images of an image 37 1 ₍₄₎ of the 4 th hold) is displayed.

When there is a hold of the change of the second special symbol, the image of the first hold (the first hold in the order of change) in the second special symbol is on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the change in the image display device 31. 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold up to four images of an image 37 2 of the (variation order is 4 th hold) ₍₄₎ is displayed. Here, in FIG. 7B, only images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown for the sake of simplicity.

When the number of hold displays of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 increases, images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the increased number of holds are displayed. Appear. When hold display number of the second special symbol reservation display 24 is increased, the image ₃₇ 2 corresponding to the number of pending after the increase _(1), 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ 2 (4) Appear.

While the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of hold displays of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is being displayed, the special symbol is displayed once. Every time the fluctuation of the fluctuation is completed, the image 37 (0) of the fluctuation disappears, the image 37 ₁ (1) of the first hold moves to the position of the fluctuation image 37 (0) of the fluctuation, and the images after the second hold. 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) moves to the position to the right of each.

Image ₃₇ 2 corresponding to the hold display number of the second special symbol reservation display 24 _(1), 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ display in 2 (4), one of the special symbols Each time a change is completed, the image 37 (0) disappear in the variation, the first hold image 37 2 ₍₁₎ is moved to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, the second pending subsequent image 37 ₂ (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ 2 (4) is moved to a position to the left of each.

In the following description, the image _{37 (0)} 37 1 (1), ₃₇ 1 (2), 37 1 _(3), 37 1 (4), 37 _{2 (1),} 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 ( 3), and ₃₇ 2 (4) appropriately called "hold display image 37".

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a mode of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 operates in five modes: a normal mode, a live mode, a special training mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. Of the five modes, the normal mode, the live mode, and the special training mode are modes related to the progress of the game. The normal mode, the live mode, and the special training mode can be changed to the normal start operation or the RAM clear start operation after the game machine 1 goes through the initialization process and enters the customer waiting state. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are setting modes related to the setting related to the jackpot lottery. The setting change mode can be changed only when the first special activation operation is performed. The setting confirmation mode can be changed only when the second special activation operation is performed. The procedure of each start operation will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, the gaming machine 1 is in a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state in the normal mode, is in a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state in the live mode, and is in a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state in the special training mode. It becomes a state and a time-saving game state.

More specifically, when the normal start operation or the RAM clear start operation is performed, the game machine 1 enters the normal mode after undergoing the initialization process. The player starts the game in the normal mode. In the normal mode, in addition to the design variation effect, the stage effect of three stages, the marine stage, the savanna stage, and the cosmo stage, is performed. In the stage effect of the savanna stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the sea is displayed as the background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the savanna stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the savanna is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the cosmo stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the universe is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the normal mode, there is a stage change at each predetermined timing (for example, immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display) in the fluctuation display with one or a plurality of fluctuation displays in between. In this stage change, the type of stage production will change.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the probability variation hit is won, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect of the live mode. In the live mode effect, the live recorded video is displayed as the background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. The live mode production will continue until the jackpot is won again. If the next winning jackpot is a probable hit, the production after the end of the special game will be the production of live mode again. If the next winning jackpot is a normal hit, the production after the end of the special game will be the production in the special training mode.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when a normal hit is won, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect of the special training mode. In the special training mode effect when a normal hit is won, an animation image showing how the character specially trains for the live is displayed as the background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. .. The remaining number of special training modes is displayed in the lower right corner of the background image. The remaining number of times is counted down as 100 → 99 → 98 ... → 1 each time the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are confirmed (completely stopped) in a lost manner. In the fluctuation symbol variation effect in which the remaining number of times is 1, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop in a lost manner, an image of "special training mode end" appears. The effect in which the image of "special training mode end" appears is a special training mode end confirmation effect that notifies that the end of the time-saving game state has been confirmed. The production after the special training mode end confirmation production is the production of the normal mode.

In the symbol variation effect, the game machine 1 has a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a full rotation reach effect, a re-lottery effect, a challenge effect, and a surprise operation based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35. Select one or more effects from a plurality of types of effects including the effect, shortened variable effect, and specific advance notice effect, and perform the selected one or more effects on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive for the effect. The devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute. Further, in the special game production, the game machine 1 selects and selects one or a plurality of productions among a plurality of types of productions including a rank-up production based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the production button 35. The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to perform one or more effects. The outline of each effect executed as a symbol variation effect or a special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The reach effect may be executed after the normal fluctuation over a predetermined time within the fluctuation time T of the special symbol (the variation in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed separately). The period from time t _{RCA to} t _RCB . In the reach effect, at the time t _RCA within the fluctuation time T, one of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (the left symbol 36L in the example of FIGS. 12A and 12B) is temporarily stopped. At the subsequent time t _RCB , the other of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (the right symbol 36R in the example of FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)) is provisionally of the same type as the one stopped earlier. Stop.

In the reach effect, due to the temporary stop of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are in the reach mode (the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are the same symbol while the middle symbol 36C is fluctuating). The mode is temporarily stopped by the combination). After the temporary stop in the reach mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 12A, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are the hit modes. In some cases, the process temporarily stops at (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "hit reach effect"), and as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are provisionally lost. It may proceed to a production to stop (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "missing reach production"). Here, the lost reach effect of the present embodiment is an effect that progresses to a temporary stop in the lost mode after the temporary stop in the reach mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, and the left symbol 36L, It is not an effect from the temporary stop of the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R in the reach mode to the confirmation (complete stop) in the loss mode.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), a missed notice effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. In the missed notice effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are lost before the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in the lost mode. It is a production that announces that it will stop in a mode. In the off-off notice effect, the characters "ha-zu-re" appear under the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the SP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The SP reach effect may be executed after the loss reach effect is executed in the symbol variation (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reach variation”) accompanying the establishment of the reach. The SP reach effect is not executed in the symbol fluctuation (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "normal fluctuation"), which is stopped only by the normal fluctuation without the establishment of the reach. The SP reach production is a development production that develops from the reach production. The SP reach effect is a revival effect indicating that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R have been restored from a state in which they are likely to be determined in a lost manner in the normal fluctuation. Before the start of the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner. After that, the middle symbol 36C among the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts rotating at high speed, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen. In the SP reach effect, an animated character image by a plurality of characters is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from reach production to SP reach production is higher than when it does not develop into SP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 13B, the SPSP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The SPSP reach effect may be executed after the loss reach effect in the reach fluctuation is executed. In normal fluctuation, the SPSP reach effect is not executed. The SPSP reach production is a development production that develops from the SP reach production. The SPSP reach effect is a revival effect indicating that in the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R have been restored from a state in which they are likely to be determined in a lost manner. In the SP reach effect before the SPSP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner. After that, the middle symbol 36C among the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts rotating at high speed, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen. In the SPSP reach production, the recorded video of the singing by all the characters is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from SP reach production to SPSP reach production is higher than when it does not develop into SPSP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the SP specific advance notice effect may be executed together with the SP reach effect. In the SP specific notice production, an image of a table on which the characters of SP are written and a mini character MC1 dancing on the table appears in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini character MC1 is a character that plays a role of suggesting the possibility of developing an SP reach effect. Here, since the SP reach effect is an effect that progresses from a temporary stop in the lost mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the normal fluctuation, the appearance of the mini character MC1 is the left symbol in the normal fluctuation. It is nothing but a notice that the 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R will be temporarily stopped in a lost manner.

As shown in FIG. 13D, the SPSP specific notice effect may be executed in addition to the SPSP reach effect. In the SPSP specific notice effect, an image of a table on which the characters of SPSP are written and a mini character MC2 dancing on the table appears in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini character MC2 is a character that plays a role of suggesting the possibility of developing an SPSP reach effect. Here, since the SPSP reach effect is an effect that progresses from a temporary stop in the lost mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the SP reach effect, the appearance of the mini character MC2 is in the SP reach effect. It is nothing but a notice that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner.

As shown in FIG. 14, a full rotation reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The full rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are varied while being aligned with the same symbol combination. The full rotation reach effect may be performed at the end of normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation. The full rotation reach effect may be executed in the normal variation and the reach variation, or may be executed only in the reach variation. The full rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it is determined in the hit mode).

As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b), and 15 (c), the re-lottery effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are confirmed (completely stopped) in a stop mode of 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 8R normal. It is the end of the reach fluctuation that has become. In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

Before the start of the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999". Temporarily stop at any of the above. In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R start re-variation after a temporary stop over a short period of time. This re-variation effect is a promotion effect that produces whether or not to promote from an 8R probability variation hit or an 8R normal hit to a 16R probability variation hit.

As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the 16R probability variation is won, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are re-variated, and then the left symbol 36L, when the special symbol is stopped, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are the stop modes per 16R probability variation (left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R is "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display mode. ) To confirm. The effect determined by the stop mode of the 16R probability variation is a promotion confirmation effect indicating that the player has been promoted from the 8R probability variation hit or the 8R normal hit to the 16R probability variation hit.

As shown in FIG. 15 (b), when the 8R probability variation is won, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are re-variated, and then the left symbol 36L, when the special symbol is stopped, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in the stop mode per 8R probability variation.

As shown in FIG. 15C, when the 8R normal hit is won, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are re-variated, and then the left symbol 36L, when the special symbol is stopped, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in the stop mode per 8R normal.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (a), 16 (b), and 16 (c), a dialogue operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The dialogue operation effect may be executed from the beginning (before the reach is established) to the end of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation. In the dialogue effect, a silhouette image and a balloon frame that repeat a round display of character A silhouette → character B silhouette → character C silhouette → character D silhouette → character A silhouette appear. Slightly after the appearance of the silhouette image and the balloon frame, an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 35 (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the operation acceptance validity period, and an image of "press!" Appear. The production) is performed.

When the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period indicated by the indicator image, the one-round display of the silhouette is stopped, the characters A, B, C, or D appear, and the dialogue is displayed in the balloon frame. There are three types of lines that appear in the balloon frame: "...", "It's a chance", and "It's a fever". The reliability of the jackpot of the three types of dialogue production, "It's intense heat", "It's a chance", and "..." is "It's intense heat"> "It's a chance"> "..." It becomes higher in the order of. When "..." appears in the dialogue operation effect, the fluctuation does not develop and is confirmed in a lost manner. The dialogue notice effect of "..." is one of the loss notice effects for notifying that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R will stop in the loss mode.

As shown in FIG. 16D, a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect may be executed in addition to the dialogue operation effect. The dialogue operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing the dialogue operation effect. In the dialogue operation specific notice effect, behind the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, the dialogue (“It's intense heat” in the example of FIG. 16D), which is the operation result of the dialogue operation production, is translucent. The dialogue deja vu image shown by is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, a challenge effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The challenge effect is executed after the loss reach effect in the reach fluctuation is executed. If the 2R probability variation hit (short hit) is won, the challenge production will be a challenge success production, and if it is lost, the challenge production will be a challenge failure production.

Before the start of the challenge effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner. After the temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, the screen goes dark (blackout), and after the blackout over a predetermined period, the second movable accessory 330b tilts. After that, the characters "Labyrinth Challenge", the image of the castle, and the image of the guardian who protects the castle appear, and the display of the image of the character moving through the labyrinth begins. After displaying the video for a predetermined period, an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 (an image that imitates the effect button 35, an indicator image that indicates the operation reception validity period, and an image of "press!" Appears) Is done.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the 2R probability variation hit (short hit) is won, the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation acceptance valid period shown by the indicator image, or the effect button 35 is not operated. When the operation reception validity period has passed, the challenge revival production will be performed. In the challenge revival effect, the first movable accessory 330a descends, a challenge notification effect image (rose image) appears in the ring of the first movable accessory 330a in the display screen of the image display device 31, and the sound is output. A short hit notification effect sound (sound of "cuein") is output from the device 32. After this effect, when the special symbol is stopped, the image of my character and "Challenge succeeded!" Appears, and the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and 4th symbol 36Z stop per 2R probability variation. It is determined by the aspect (left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R is "135").

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the case of a loss, regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the first movable accessory 330a is lowered, the short hit notification effect image is displayed, and the short hit notification effect sound is displayed. No output is done. In this case, when the special symbol is stopped, an image of "failure" appears, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in a lost manner.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, a battle effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The battle effect is executed after the loss reach effect in the reach fluctuation is executed. If any of 16R probability variation hit, 8R probability variation hit, and 8R normal hit is won, the battle production is a battle success production, and if it is lost, it is a battle failure production.

Before the start of the battle effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner. In the battle production, an image of my character on the left side, another character of the opponent in the battle on the right side, and "VS" appears. After that, the image of "Jan" and the image of "Ken" appear in order, and the image showing the result of the first battle is displayed. The results of the battle include "Aiko", "Win", and "Loss". If the result of the battle is "Aiko", the image of "Jan" and the image of "Ken" appear in order, and the image showing the result of the second battle is displayed. This "Aiko"-> "Jan"-> "Ken"-> battle result display is repeated until the result is "win" or "lose".

As shown in FIG. 18A, when any of 16R probability variation hit, 8R probability variation hit, and 8R normal hit is won, the result of "winning" is obtained after one or more "Aiko". It is displayed, and an image of my character and an image of "Win" appear. The effect in which the image of My Character and "Win" appears is a battle success notification effect that notifies that the battle has been successful. When the image of My Character and "Win" appears, when the special symbol is stopped, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are per 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 8R normal hit. Confirm (complete stop) in the stop mode of.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the case of a loss, the result of "losing" is displayed after one or more "Aiko", and the image of the character of the opponent in the battle and the image of "Lose" are displayed. Appear. The effect in which the character of the opponent of the battle and the image of "Lose" appear is a battle failure notification effect for notifying that the battle has failed. When the character of the opponent of the battle and the image of "Lose" appear, when the special symbol is stopped, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed (completely stopped) in a lost mode. ..

As shown in FIG. 19A, a shortened variation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. Here, the shortened fluctuation is a fluctuation display in which only the normal fluctuation is stopped without the reach being established, and the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal fluctuation. The shortening variation occurs with a predetermined probability when the number of holdings is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more. In the shortened fluctuation effect, the shortened variation effect sound (sound of "Gashan") is output from the voice output device 32 in accordance with the stoppage of the fluctuation of the fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 19B, a shortened variation notice effect may be executed in addition to the shortened variation effect. The shortened fluctuation notice effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuations of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 will be shortened before the symbols of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are stopped and displayed. In the shortened fluctuation notice effect, an image of the cymbal, which is the source of the "gashan" sound, appears on the image 37 (0) of the fluctuation at the bottom of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 20A, a surprise operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The surprise operation effect may be executed after the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are temporarily stopped in a lost manner during the reach fluctuation, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, The right symbol 36R and the fourth symbol 36Z may be executed before being temporarily stopped in a lost manner. In addition, the surprise operation effect may be executed during the normal fluctuation, or may be executed during the shortened fluctuation. The surprise operation effect is one of the relief effects for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

In the surprise operation effect, the effect button 35 is in a protruding state, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 (an image imitating the effect button 35 in the protruding state, an indicator image showing the operation acceptance validity period, and "press!" The production to make the image of is appear) is performed. If the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period indicated by the indicator image, or if the operation reception valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 35, the first movable accessory 330a is lowered to display the image display device 31. A jackpot notification effect image (an image of an annular effect concentric with the ring of the first movable accessory 330a) appears in the ring of the first movable accessory 330a on the screen, and the jackpot notification effect sound is generated from the audio output device 32. (The sound of "Kuikyuikuin") is output.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), a rank-up effect may be executed as a part of the special game effect during the special game. The rank-up effect is a stop mode in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". In the special game that is performed when the decision is made, at the beginning of the execution of the special game, which jackpot was won in the middle of the special game without clearly indicating whether the 8R probability variation hit or the 8R normal hit was won. It is a production that clearly shows. The rank-up effect is executed during the period from T _{SKK to} t _RDE , which is the time after the start time t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the rank-up effect, the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 35, and when the number of times the effect button 35 is repeatedly hit reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), it is notified whether or not the 8R probability variation hits.

More specifically, in the rank-up effect, at the time t _SKK , an image of "charge the gauge and get the probability change" appears in the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the lapse of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and an operation guide image (image of "continuous hit!") Are displayed. Appear. In the gauge image, the left end of the progress range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the progress range of the gauge image is MAX, and the probability of probability variation is indicated by the amount of progress between MIN and MAX.

In the rank-up effect, if the effect button 35 is repeatedly hit within the operation reception valid period indicated by the indicator image, the amount of progress in the gauge image advances to the right in accordance with the repeated hits. If the number of repeated hits of the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period reaches 30 times, or if the end time t _RDE of the operation reception valid period is reached without the number of repeated hits reaching 30, the rank is increased at the end time t _RDE . You will be notified whether it succeeded or failed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the production of successful rank-up, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches "MAX", and images of "success" and "congratulations on the probability change" are displayed. When the effect of successful rank-up is executed in the special game, the effect of the live mode (FIG. 11 (a)) is performed after the end of the special game.

As shown in FIG. 21B, in the effect of the rank-up failure, the amount of progress of the gauge stops in front of "MAX", and the image of "failure" is displayed. When the effect of the rank-up failure is executed in the special game, the effect of the special training mode (FIG. 11B) is performed after the end of the special game.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (b), 10 (c), and 10 (d), a stage change notice effect may be executed before the stage is changed in the variable display in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the stage change notice effect for notifying the stage change to the savanna stage, a mini character related to the savanna stage (an elephant mini character in the example of FIG. 10 (b)) appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the stage change notice effect for notifying the stage change to the cosmo stage, a mini character related to the cosmo stage (a rocket mini character in the example of FIG. 10 (c)) appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the stage change notice effect for notifying the stage change to the marine stage, a mini character related to the marine stage (a dolphin mini character in the example of FIG. 10 (d)) appears. As shown in FIG. 10A, the stage change notice effect may be performed immediately before the stop of the variation display of the special symbol, or immediately after the stop of the variation display of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 10B. It may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 10B, it may be performed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game machine 1 may execute a look-ahead effect effect when the change of the special symbol is suspended due to the start winning of the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. The look-ahead effect effect is an effect that suggests that there may be a big hit in the hold due to the appearance of the effect image.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the start-up prize causes the change of the special symbol to be held, and in the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the start-up prize causes the hold. When a look-ahead effect effect whose final variation is the variation corresponding to the generated 1st special symbol (4th hold) is executed, each of the normal variation or the shortened variation between the start winning prize and the variation before the final variation. Time t _EF immediately after the start (In the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the time t _EF (3) immediately after the start of the fluctuation three times before the final fluctuation and the fluctuation two times before the final fluctuation At the time t _EF (2) immediately after the start and the time t _EF (1) immediately after the start of the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation, an effect image (an image imitating a lightning bolt) appears behind the effect symbol 36. The look-ahead effect sound is output from the audio output device 32. In the look-ahead effect effect, the reliability of the jackpot of the final fluctuation increases in the order of blue effect <green effect <red effect. The mode of the effect image and the look-ahead effect sound is different between the normal variation and the shortened variation. In normal fluctuation, one lightning bolt appears behind the middle symbol 36C, and a beeping sound is output. In the shortened variation, two lightning bolts appear behind the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R, and a "shining" sound is output.

Here, since the look-ahead effect effect is an effect that suggests that the final fluctuation may be a big hit, the fluctuation of the lightning bolt immediately after the start of the fluctuation display in the normal fluctuation or the shortened fluctuation before the final fluctuation is lost. It is nothing but a notice of stopping and displaying with the design of. Further, since the look-ahead effect sound in the normal fluctuation is "Pika", the look-ahead effect sound in the normal fluctuation is "Pika Pika", so that the output of the "Pika Pika" sound immediately after the start of the fluctuation display in the shortened fluctuation is It is nothing but a notice that the fluctuation will be a shortened fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the game machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171 and a power switch 172 are formed. is there. The main control board 110 is covered with a removable cover 119. FIG. 23 is an assembly view showing the cover 119 of the main control board 110 and the configuration inside the cover 119. Inside the cover 119, there is a RAM clear switch 174, a setting key 177, and a monitor 178.

The RAM clear switch 174 changes from the OFF state to the ON state by pushing it inward with a finger. The setting key 177 is switched between the OFF state and the ON state by inserting the key 176 into the keyhole of the setting key 177 and turning it. The monitor 178 consists of a 4-digit 8-segment LED (7 LEDs forming a number and 1 LED forming a decimal point). A hole 173 is bored inside the lower left corner of the cover 119. Even when the cover 119 is attached to the main control board 110, the RAM clear switch 174 at the back of the hole 173 can be pressed to turn it on. When the cover 119 is attached to the main control board 110, the setting key 177 cannot be operated, but the monitor 178 is visible.

When the start-up operation is performed on the game machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130 to start the boards 110, 120, and 130. The main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130 can operate independently when the power is turned on.

Here, the starting operation of the game machine 1 includes a normal starting operation, a RAM clear starting operation, a first special starting operation, and a second special starting operation. As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal startup operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the normal start operation is performed, the game machine 1 restores the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c in the initialization process, and performs the normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the RAM clear start operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear start operation is performed, the game machine 1 clears the used area of the main RAM 110c in the initialization process, and performs the normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 26 (A), in the first special start operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The first special activation operation must be performed with the glass door 50 open. When the first special activation operation is performed, the game machine 1 performs a setting change mode process in the initialization process. In the setting change mode, the monitor 178 of the main control board 110 displays a number indicating the current jackpot lottery probability setting (in the example of FIG. 26A, “0001” indicating setting 1). In the setting change mode, the jackpot lottery probability setting can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 26 (B), when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Each time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically in the order of "0002"-> "0003"-> "0004"-> "0005"-> "0006"-> "0001". If you want to confirm the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, return the setting key 177 to the OFF state and turn off the power switch 172. When the power switch 172 is turned off, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to "0002" in the example of FIG. 26B) is confirmed as a new setting, and the setting of this setting is confirmed. Information is written to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and after this writing, a process related to power off is executed. After that, when the normal startup operation (FIG. 24) is performed again, the setting information of the main RAM 110c is restored in the initialization process. After the customer is waiting after the initialization process, the jackpot lottery is performed under the jackpot lottery probability indicated by this setting information.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the second special start operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The second special activation operation must be performed with the glass door 50 open. When the second special activation operation is performed, the game machine 1 performs a setting confirmation mode process in the initialization process. In the setting confirmation mode, the monitor 178 of the main control board 110 displays a number indicating the current jackpot lottery probability setting (in the example of FIG. 27, “0002” indicating that the setting is 2.).

In FIG. 3, the main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the game machine 1. The main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110 m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is composed of a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

The input port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a general winning port detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first starting port detection switch 14a, a second starting port detection switch 15a, and a first large winning port detection switch. 16a, the second prize opening detection switch 17a, the door opening switch 18a, the magnetic detection sensor 18b, and the vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, and a second special. A symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24, a normal symbol hold display 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated on the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads a program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer. Further, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the displays 23 to 25, and transmits a command to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready for play, the jackpot random number value, the special symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, While updating various random number values including the random number value for special symbol fluctuation and the normal symbol random number value within each random number range, the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the progress of the game such as the special game are controlled.

Data such as a game control program is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. The main ROM 110b contains a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a hit determination table for the normal symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, and a large winning opening. Various tables such as an open / close control table and a setting table at the end of a special game are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. The main RAM 110c includes a special symbol hold storage area, a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a normal symbol general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, and a number of rounds (R). ) Storage area, number of balls entered in the large winning opening (C) Storage area, high-probability game flag storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, game state buffer, first special symbol hold number counter, second special symbol hold number counter, normal Various types of counters such as symbol hold count counter, high probability game count (X) counter, time reduction count (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for production, etc. A storage area is provided. Here, when the power is cut off, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by the backup power supply after adding a checksum, and when the power is restored, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored through the data check by the checksum. I'm getting it.

The power supply board 170 supplies the power supply voltage to the game machine 1 and also supplies the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 with a power interruption detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become a predetermined value or less. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply including a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the power failure detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value, and lowers the power failure detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value.

The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives a command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, an image display executed by the image display device 31, a sound output executed by the sound output device 32, and an effect drive. It controls the operation performed by the devices 33a, 33b, 33c, or the blinking performed by the effect lighting device 34. More specifically, the effect control board 120 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 110 from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates by the supplied power when the power is supplied to the game machine 1, and operates by the power of the backup power source mounted on the power supply board 170 when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

The sub CPU 120a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 120b and performs arithmetic processing based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the input signal from the timer, and lamps the corresponding command based on the processing. It is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. When the start operation is performed, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready for play, the random number values for production 1 to 21 (each in a random number range of 0 to 99). While updating various random number values including (21 kinds of random number values) within each random number range, the effect according to the progress of the game is controlled. Here, the same random number values 1 to 21 for the effect are not acquired at the same time.

Data such as an effect control program is stored in the sub ROM 120b of the effect control board 120. Various tables such as a variation effect pattern determination table are stored in the sub ROM 120b. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub-RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as an effect information storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a symbol variation effect pattern storage area, a game state storage area, and an effect pattern storage area.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing main commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 is composed of a total of 2 bytes of data, which is 1 byte MODE data indicating the type of the command and 1 byte DATA data indicating the content of the command.

The "symbol designation command" such as "missing symbol designation command", "first probability variation length per symbol designation command", "first probability variation development per symbol designation command" is the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display. This is a command for designating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 21.

The "1st special symbol hold number designation command" such as "1st special symbol hold number 0 designation command", "1st special symbol hold number 1 designation command" is a command indicating the hold number of the change of the 1st special symbol. is there. The "second special symbol hold number specification command" such as the "second special symbol hold number 0 designation command" and the "second special symbol hold number 1 designation command" is a command indicating the hold number of changes in the second special symbol. is there. In the following description, the "first special symbol hold number designation command" and the "second special symbol hold number designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol hold number designation command" as appropriate.

The "fluctuation stop command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed.

The "power-on designation command" is a command indicating that the power has been turned on to the main control board 110. The "RAM clear designation command" is a command indicating that the information in the main RAM 110c has been cleared. "Power recovery 1 designation command", "power recovery 2 designation command", "power recovery 3 designation command", and "power recovery 4 designation command" (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "power recovery designation command" as appropriate) , Is a command indicating that the power is turned on again to the main control board 110. The "power restoration 1 designation command" indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the "low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state". The "power restoration 2 designation command" indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is "low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state". The "power restoration 3 designation command" indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is "high probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state". The "power restoration 4 designation command" indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is "high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state".

The "customer waiting designation command" is a command indicating that the customer waiting state has been entered.

The "first special symbol fluctuation start command" such as "first special symbol fluctuation start 1 fluctuation start command" and "first special symbol fluctuation start 2 fluctuation start command" is the first in the first special symbol display device 20. 1 This is a command indicating to start the fluctuation of the special symbol. The "second special symbol fluctuation start command" such as "second special symbol fluctuation start 11 fluctuation start command" and "second special symbol fluctuation start 12 fluctuation start command" is the second special symbol display device 21. 2 This is a command to indicate that the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. In the following description, the "first special symbol variation start command" and the "second special symbol variation start command" are collectively referred to as "variation start command" as appropriate.

The "starting prize designation command for the first special symbol" such as the "starting prize 1 designation command for the first special symbol" and the "starting prize 2 designation command for the first special symbol" is the starting prize for the first starting port 14 (the first). 1 This is a command indicating (winning a game ball to the starting port 14). The "starting prize designation command for the second special symbol" such as the "starting prize 11 designation command for the second special symbol" and the "starting prize 12 designation command for the second special symbol" is the starting prize for the second starting port 15. 2 This is a command indicating (winning of a game ball to the starting port 15). In the following description, the "starting prize designation command for the first special symbol" and the "starting prize designation command for the second special symbol" are collectively referred to as a "starting prize designation command" as appropriate.

"Round start command" such as "Long hit open 1st round start command", "Long hit open 2nd round start command", "Short hit open 1st round start command" is for each round of special game. This is a command to indicate that it will start. The "opening designation command" such as the "probability variation length hit opening designation command" and the "normal length hit opening designation command" is a special game start command indicating that the special game has been started. The "ending designation command" is a special game end command indicating that the special game ends.

The "game state 1 designated command", "game state 2 designated command", "game state 3 designated command", and "game state 4 designated command" are commands indicating the game state of the game machine 1. The "game state 1 designation command" indicates that the game state is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. The "game state 2 designation command" indicates that the game state is a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. The "game state 3 designation command" indicates that the game state is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The "game state 4 designation command" indicates that the game state is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

The "dish full tank error command" is a command indicating that a dish full tank error has occurred. The plate full tank error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the plate 40 is full. The "counter case error command" is a command indicating that a counter case error has occurred. The counter case error occurs when a ball clogging between the saucer 40 and the payout mechanism is detected. The "counting switch disconnection error command" is a command indicating that a counting switch disconnection error has occurred. The counting switch disconnection error occurs when it is detected that the wiring between the payout control board 130 and the payout device relay terminal board or the wiring between the payout device relay terminal board and the payout mechanism unit is disconnected.

The "ballless error command" is a command indicating that a ballless error has occurred. The no-ball error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that there is no game ball in the payout device. The "overpayment error command" is a command indicating that an overpayment error command has occurred. The overpayment error occurs when it is detected that the payout is overpaid (the payout device has paid more than the requested number). The "payout command error command" is a command indicating that a payout command error has occurred. The payout command error occurs when it is detected that there is an abnormality in the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 130.

The "door opening error command" is a command indicating that a door opening error has occurred. The door opening error occurs when the door opening switch 18a detects the opening of the glass door 50. The "switch unconnected error command" is a command indicating that a switch unconnected error has occurred. Switch non-connection errors are general winning opening detection switch 12a, gate detection switch 13a, first starting opening detection switch 14a, second starting opening detection switch 15a, first major winning opening detection switch 16a, and second major winning opening detection. It occurs when a disconnection or connection failure in any of the switches 17a is detected.

The "abnormal winning error command" is a command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. As for the abnormal winning error, the starting winning of the second starting port 15 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 15a after 1.200 seconds have elapsed from the time when the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is closed. When, when the movable piece 17b of the second special winning opening 17 is not operating and the winning of the second special winning opening 17 is detected by the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, or when the winning of the first large winning opening 16 It occurs when the start winning of the first winning opening 16 is detected by the first winning opening detection switch 16a when the opening / closing door 16b of the first winning opening is not operating.

The "discharge error command" is a command indicating that a discharge error has occurred. The discharge error includes the number of game balls that have passed through the switches 12a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a of each winning opening 12, 14, 15, 16, and 17, and the number of ball game balls that have passed through the frame count switch (not shown). Occurs when the error of exceeds a predetermined number.

The "magnet detection error command" and the "vibration detection error command" are fraud occurrence commands indicating that fraud has occurred. The magnet detection error occurs when the magnetic detection sensor 18b detects magnetism. The vibration detection error occurs when the vibration detection sensor 18c detects the vibration of the game machine 1.

The "dish full tank error resolution command" is a command indicating that the dish full tank error has been resolved. The "counter case error resolution command" is a command indicating that the counter case error has been resolved. The "counting switch disconnection error resolution command" is a command indicating that the counting switch disconnection error has been resolved. The "ballless error resolution command" is a command indicating that the ballless error has been resolved. The "excess payout error resolution command" is a command indicating that the excess payout error has been resolved. The "payout command error resolution command" is a command indicating that the payout command error has been resolved. The "door opening error resolution command" is a command indicating that the door opening error has been resolved. The "switch unconnected error resolution command" is a command indicating that the switch unconnected error has been resolved. The "abnormal winning error resolution command" is a command indicating that the abnormal winning error has been resolved. The "discharge error resolution command" is a command indicating that the discharge error has been resolved. The "magnet detection error resolution command" is a command indicating that the magnet detection error has been resolved. The "vibration detection error resolution command" is a command indicating that the vibration detection error has been resolved.

Here, among the above commands, the symbol designation command, the special symbol hold number designation command, the fluctuation stop command, the customer waiting designation command, the fluctuation start command, the start prize designation command, the round start command, the opening designation command, the ending designation command, And the game state designation command is a command related to the progress of the game on the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands are appropriately referred to as "game commands".

Power-on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power recovery specification command, full tank error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, ballless error command, overpayment error command, payout command error command, door open error Command, switch unconnected error command, abnormal winning error command, discharge error command, magnet detection error command, vibration detection error command, full tank error resolution command, counter case error resolution command, counting switch disconnection error resolution command, ballless error resolution Command, payout excess error resolution command, payout command error resolution command, door open error resolution command, switch disconnection error resolution command, abnormal winning error resolution command, discharge error resolution command, magnet detection error resolution command, and vibration detection error resolution command Is a special command unrelated to the progress of the game on the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands are appropriately referred to as "special commands".

In FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 controls the payout of the game ball. The payout control board 130 is bidirectionally communicatively connected to the main control board 110. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads the program stored in the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing based on the input signal from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer, and based on the process, sends the corresponding command to the main control board 110. Send. A payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage portion of the game balls is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out a predetermined game ball. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

The lamp control board 140 controls the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34. The lamp control board 140 controls energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, and the light in the effect lighting device 34. The lighting control of the motor and the drive control of the motor for changing the light irradiation direction are performed.

The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is bidirectionally communicatively connected to the effect control board 120. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, VDP, and an acoustic DSP (not shown). The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When a command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU controls the operation of the VDP and the acoustic DSP by generating a control signal according to the content of the command and outputting the control signal to the VDP and the acoustic DSP.

The VDP of the image control board 150 is an image ROM that stores material data necessary for image generation, a drawing engine that executes image drawing processing, and an output that outputs an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31. It has a circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

The acoustic DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to an acoustic ROM that stores various acoustic data related to music, audio, sound effects, and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP. The acoustic DSP reads acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and amplifies the sound signal obtained by this data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU. Then, the amplified sound signal is output to the audio output device 32.

Next, the operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110 of the game machine 1. In the main process, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by a start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, first special start operation, or second special start operation) to main the main control board 110. It is started when the system reset occurs in the CPU 110a.

In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes the game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to the power being turned on. The details of the initialization process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power cutoff monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the game machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off occurs, the firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, And the ball feed solenoid 4b) stops the launch of the game ball, clears the output port, stops the payout of the game ball by the payout device, creates and saves checksums in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power failure. After performing a series of processes for setting the above, access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power failure. The details of the power failure monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a game random number value update process (S30). In the game random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process (S40). In the initial random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

After that, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of steps S20 to S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing every time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. The details of this timer interrupt processing will be described later.

30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the details of the initialization process (S10) of FIG. 29. In FIG. 31, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 performs a process of waiting for 2000 ms after performing a security check of the main CPU 110a (S10-1).

Next, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c (S10-2). Next, the main CPU 110a sets the serial communication port (S10-3). Next, the main CPU 110a sets the watch dock timer (S10-4). Here, the watchdog timer monitors whether or not the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is operating normally according to the game control program. When an error occurs in the game control program and the running game control program is interrupted or stopped, or when only the loop processing is repeatedly executed so that other game processing is not executed after the program execution is interrupted. When the timer count unit of the watchdog timer counts up during the stopped state or the standby state due to the loop processing, the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is forcibly initialized.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S10-5). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an error has occurred, and when it is determined that an error has occurred, sends an error command for the error to the effect control board 120. Here, the reason for determining the error in the initialization process is as follows. Some errors are difficult to resolve while the game machine 1 is operating. When such an error occurs at the time of starting the game machine 1, it is preferable to notify the occurrence of the error before the game machine 1 finishes the initialization process and shifts to the customer waiting state. For the above reasons, in the game machine 1, an error is determined in the initialization process.

Next, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-6). After that, the main CPU 110a outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 160 to generate a game ball by a launch mechanism (a launch mechanism including a touch sensor 3a, a launch volume 3b, a launch solenoid 4a, and a ball feed solenoid 4b). Set to enable firing (S10-7).

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8). When the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-9. When the setting key 177 is in the OFF state (S10-8: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11 in FIG.

In step S10-9, it is determined whether or not the glass door 50 is open. If the glass door 50 is open (S10-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-10. When the glass door 50 is closed (S10-9: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11.

In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. If the first special activation operation (FIG. 26 (A)) is performed, the determination result of this step is "No", and if the second special activation operation (FIG. 27) is performed, the determination result of this step is "No". Yes ". The main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-30 when the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-10: No). If the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-40.

In step S10-30, the main CPU 110a performs the setting change mode process. In the setting change mode processing, the main CPU 110a performs processing related to the display of the monitor 178 and the update of the setting information of the jackpot lottery probability in the main RAM 110c. In the setting confirmation mode processing, processing related to the display of the monitor 178 is performed. Details of the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing will be described later.

In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. If the RAM clear start operation (FIG. 25) is performed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the normal start operation (FIG. 24) is performed, the determination result of this step is "No". When the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-11: No), the process proceeds to step S10-12.

In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is normal. If the power failure occurrence information is not normal (S10-12: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the power failure occurrence information is normal (S10-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-13.

In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to the next step S10-14. In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. More specifically, the main CPU 110a calculates from the checksum calculated in step S10-13 and the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the power failure monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power failure. The checksum saved in the main RAM 110c is collated, and if they match, it is determined that the checksum is normal (backup is valid and data recovery is possible), and if they do not match, the checksum is not normal (backup). Is not valid and data recovery is impossible). If the checksum is not normal (S10-14: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the checksum is normal (S10-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-15.

In step S10-15, the main CPU 110a sets the main RAM 110c when the backup is valid. Then, the process proceeds to step S10-16. In step S10-16, the main CPU 110a transmits one of the power recovery 1 designation command, the power recovery 2 designation command, the power recovery 3 designation command, and the power recovery 4 designation command to the effect control board 120. More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area of the main RAM 110c, and when the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is not set (previous time). When the gaming state at the time of power interruption is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state), the power restoration 1 designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. In addition, when the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set (when the game state at the time of the previous power interruption was the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state), the power recovery 2 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. If the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set (when the game state at the time of the previous power failure was the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state), the power recovery 3 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. In addition, when the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is set (when the game state at the time of the previous power interruption was the high-probability game state and the short game state), the power recovery 4 designation command is issued. It is transmitted to the effect control board 120. After the execution of steps S10-16, the initialization process this time is terminated.

In step S10-17, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c. By clearing the used area, predetermined data in the used area (for example, various random value values and flags backed up at the time of the previous power interruption) are initialized.

After executing step S10-17, the main CPU 110a sets the main RAM 110c when the backup is not valid (S10-18). After that, the main CPU 110a clears the watch dock timer (S10-19). After that, the main CPU 110a transmits a RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-20). After executing step S10-20, the initialization process this time is terminated.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change mode process (step S10-30 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 32, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change command to the effect control board 120 (S10-31). The setting change command is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-32). After that, the process proceeds to steps S10-33.

In steps S10-33, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the game machine 1 has been cut off. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that a power failure has occurred when a power failure detection signal indicating that the power supply voltage has become a predetermined value or less is input from the power supply unit (not shown) of the power supply board 170. If no power failure detection signal is input, it is determined that the power supply has not been cut off. If the operation of turning off the power switch 174 (FIG. 26 (B)) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the power supply has not been cut off (S10-33: No), the process proceeds to step S10-34. If it is determined that a power failure has occurred (S10-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-37.

In steps S10-34, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed. If the operation of pressing the RAM clear switch 174 (FIG. 26 (B)) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-34: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-35. If the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-34: No), the process proceeds to step S10-33.

In steps S10-35, the main CPU 110a rewrites the setting information in the setting information storage area in the main RAM 110c to the setting of the next stage. Next, the main CPU 110a changes the number of monitors 178 to the number corresponding to the rewritten setting information (S10-36). After that, the process returns to steps S10-33, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

In steps S10-37, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in steps S10-37 is collated with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization process at the time of the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14 of 31), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and the data can be recovered) depending on whether or not the two match.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the power failure occurrence information (S10-38). After that, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S10-39). After executing steps S10-39, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power failure.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting confirmation mode processing (step S10-40 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-41). The setting confirmation command is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-42). Then, the process proceeds to steps S10-43.

In steps S10-43, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the game machine 1 has been cut off. When the main CPU 110a determines that a power failure has occurred (S10-43: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-47.

In steps S10-47, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in steps S10-47 is collated with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization process at the time of the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14 of 31), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and the data can be recovered) depending on whether or not the two match.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the power failure occurrence information (S10-48). After that, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S10-49). After executing steps S10-49, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power failure.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing details of the power failure monitoring process (step S20 of FIG. 29). In FIG. 34, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 is set to disable interrupts (S20-1). Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the game machine 1 has been cut off (S20-2). If the main CPU 110a determines that the power supply has not been cut off (S20-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-3. If it is determined that a power failure has occurred (S20-2: No), the process proceeds to step S20-4.

In step S20-3, the main CPU 110a is set to enable interrupts. After executing step S20-3, the main CPU 110a ends the current power failure monitoring process.

In step S20-4, the main CPU 110a sets the launch of the game ball by the launch mechanism to stop by outputting a launch stop signal to the launch control board 160. Next, the main CPU 110a clears the output port (S20-5). After that, the main CPU 110a transmits a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 130 (S20-6). When the payout control board 130 receives the power cutoff designation command, it returns a command related to the output of external information. The main CPU 110a receives the command related to the output of the external information and stores it in the main RAM 110c (S20-7).

After executing step S20-7, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and saves the created checksum in the main RAM 110c (S20-8). Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S20-8 is collated with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization process at the time of the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14 of 31), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and the data can be recovered) depending on whether or not the two match.

After executing step S20-8, the main CPU 110a sets the power failure occurrence information (S20-9). After that, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S20-10). After executing step S20-10, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power failure.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 executes the timer interrupt process every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

In FIG. 35, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that time in the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs a time control process (S110). The time control process is a process of updating the counter used for timing various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a subtracts the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c one by one.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a random number update process (S120). In the random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a updates each random number counter by +1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

After the execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process (S130). In the initial random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first winning opening detection switch 16a, a second winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, and a second starting opening detection switch 15a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. The details of the input control processing procedure will be described later.

After executing step S200, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process (S300). In the special figure special electric control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special electric processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the game machine 1, and performs special symbol memory determination processing (special figure special electric processing). Special symbol variation processing (processing when data = 0), special symbol variation processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 2), jackpot game processing (special) One of the five processes (processing when the special figure special electric processing data = 3) and the jackpot game end processing (processing when the special electric special electric processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

After the execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control process (S400). In the normal symbol memory control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the normal symbol processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the game machine 1, and performs the normal symbol memory determination process (general diagram). Normal symbol processing data = 0 processing), normal symbol variation processing (processing when normal symbol processing data = 1), normal symbol stop processing (processing when normal symbol processing data = 2), And, one of the four processes of the auxiliary game process (process when the data is 3) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure for the Fudoden control process will be described later.

After executing step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening winning ball counter, and the second starting opening winning ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout number designation command, the payout control board 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the game ball.

After executing step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a data generation process (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a includes external output data, starting port opening / closing solenoid data, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, ordinary symbol display device data, Generate a memory number specification command.

After executing step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S700). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an error has occurred, and when it is determined that an error has occurred, sets an error command indicating the type of error that has occurred in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. .. Further, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the generated error has been resolved, and when it is determined that the error has been resolved, sets an error resolution command indicating the resolved error in the production transmission data storage area.

After executing step S700, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (S800). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs signals of external output data, starting port opening / closing solenoid data, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, and second winning opening opening / closing solenoid data created in the data generation process of step S600. Perform port output processing. Further, in order to light each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data created in the data generation process of step S600 and the normal symbol display device data are used. Performs display device output processing that outputs symbol display device data. Further, a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

After executing step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S900).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the details of the input control process. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If there is no input of the detection signal, the process proceeds to step S220 as it is. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c to update.

After the execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the large winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. If the detection signal is not input from either the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230 as it is. When a detection signal is input from the first prize opening detection switch 16a or the second prize opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the prize ball counter for the prize opening in the main RAM 110c. The number of large winning opening balls (C) in the main RAM 110c is increased by +1 to update the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area.

After the execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process (S230). In the first start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is not input from the first start port detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S240 as it is. When a detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4, and the first special symbol hold. Update the first special symbol hold number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, store the random number value in the special symbol hold storage area, pre-judgment of the jackpot lottery and specify the start prize according to the judgment result A series of processes such as a set of commands and a set of commands for specifying the number of special symbol reservations according to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) are performed. The details of the procedure of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

After the execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process (S240). In the second start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal is not input from the second start port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S250 as it is. When a detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2) is less than 4, and the second special symbol hold. Update the second special symbol hold number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, store the random number value in the special symbol hold storage area, pre-judgment the jackpot lottery and specify the start prize according to the judgment result A series of processes such as a set of commands and a set of commands for specifying the number of special symbol reservations according to the number of reservations (U2) in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) are performed. The procedure of the second start port detection switch input process and the procedure of the first start port detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data writing destination.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process as it is. When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4. Then, when the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is incremented by +1 and updated, the normal symbol random value is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random value is used as normal. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the first start port detection switch input process. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2 when the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes). When there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds a predetermined number (for example, 3) to the starting opening prize ball counter and updates it (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter that counts the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the first start port detection switch input process this time. Further, when the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is incremented by +1 and updated (S230-4).

After the execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot random number value, and the data is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol hold storage area of the special symbol hold storage area, and the number is the highest. A small storage unit is used as a data storage destination, and the acquired jackpot random number value is stored in the data storage destination storage unit (S230-5).

FIG. 38 (a) is a diagram showing a special symbol reservation storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the special symbol holding storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the fluctuation, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the holding of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. It has a second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to hold. Each of the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area has a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third storage corresponding to the third hold. It has a unit and a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol reservation storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random value, a reach determination random value, and a special symbol variation random value. It has become.

After executing step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the special symbol random value and stores the acquired special symbol random value in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol reservation storage area (S230-6). ..

After the execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random value and the reach determination random value, and stores the acquired special figure variation random value and reach determination random value in the first special symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data in (S230-7).

After executing step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs a pre-determination process (S230-8). In this pre-determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table of the main ROM 110b, and flags of the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S230-8 (when the start condition is satisfied). The presence or absence of the set and the jackpot random value, the special symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7. Based on the combination with, the winning information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. In the pre-judgment table, the jackpot random value, the special symbol random value, the game state (time-saving game state or non-time-saving game state), the reach judgment random value, the special figure variation random value, the winning information, and the start winning designation command The set refers to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. It is memorized separately.

In FIG. 37, after the execution of step S230-8, the main CPU 110a generates a start prize designation command corresponding to the prize information determined in the pre-determination process of step S230-8, and this start prize designation command is used as the production transmission data. Set in the storage area (S230-9). After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter, generates a special symbol hold number designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1), and specifies the special symbol hold number. The command is set in the transmission data storage area for production (S230-10).

The start prize designation command and the special symbol hold number designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol this time based on the description content of the start prize designation command, and designates the content of the determined effect. The command to be executed is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

Here, the procedure of the second start port detection switch input process (S240) is such that the reference destination of the hold number in steps S230-3 and S230-4 becomes the second special symbol hold number counter, steps S230-5 to S230. The point where the storage destination of the random number value in -7 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, the point where the reference destination of the random number value in step S230-8 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10. It is the same as that of the first start port detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination is the second special symbol hold number counter.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure special electric control process. In FIG. 40, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data (S301). In the following step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure If the special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special symbol special electric processing data = If it is 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol memory determination process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, determines that if the special symbol time counter is not 0, it is in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If so, it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not in progress. When the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. If the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter of the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter by -1 (S310-). 3). Here, the game machine 1 is a model that preferentially digests the hold of the change of the second special symbol over the hold of the change of the first special symbol. In such a model of the gaming machine, even if the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the preliminary determination is not performed during the time-saving gaming state.

When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter and makes the first special. It is determined whether the number of reserved symbols (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4).

When the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a performs the customer waiting setting process (S310-5). In the customer waiting setting process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area. When the customer waiting flag is not set in the customer waiting flag storage area, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting designation command in the production transmission data storage area and sets the customer waiting flag in the customer waiting flag storage area.

When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation counter by -1 (S310-). 6). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a storage area shift process (S310-7). In the storage area shift process, the main CPU 110a processes the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the symbol obtained by subtracting the hold number in steps S310-3 or S310-6. Perform the following processing as the target.

When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored as 1 each. It shifts to the previous storage unit and writes the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area to the 0th storage unit which is the determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random value, special symbol random value, reach determination random value, special symbol fluctuation random value) stored in the 0th storage unit are deleted. Will be done.

Further, when the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reservation storage area, respectively. The data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is written to the 0th storage unit by shifting to the storage unit immediately before. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random value, special symbol random value, reach determination random value, special symbol fluctuation random value) stored in the 0th storage unit are deleted. Will be done.

After executing step S310-7, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area, and if the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area, sets it. Clear (S310-8).

After executing step S310-8, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol hold number designation command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2). , This special symbol hold number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S310-9).

After executing step S310-9, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition this time, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and determines the jackpot. Generate a symbol specification command for big hits corresponding to the type of, and set it in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is lost, a symbol specification command for loss is generated and set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

More specifically, in this jackpot determination process, as shown in FIG. 42 (flow chart showing the details of the jackpot determination process), the main CPU 110a receives a jackpot result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition this time. And which of the loss is determined (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table corresponding to the current setting in the main ROM 110b, and whether or not the flag of the high-probability game flag storage area is set at the time of execution of this step S311-1 and the step. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random value stored in the 0th storage unit in S310-7.

FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 43A, the jackpot lottery determination table includes the table of setting 1, the table of setting 2, the table of setting 3, the table of setting 4, the table of setting 5, and the table of setting 6. There is a table. In the jackpot lottery judgment table of settings 1 to 6, the set of the jackpot random number value and the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery is referred to in the low probability gaming state and in the high probability gaming state. It is stored separately from the ones.

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and of 0 to 598, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and of 0 to 598, 20 values (“7” to “26” are jackpots. ").

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 2, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability game state is 0 to 578, and of 0 to 578, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 2, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 common to that of setting 1, and 20 of 0 to 598 are jackpot values (““ 7 ”to“ 26 ”).

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 3, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 548, and of 0 to 548, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 3, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 common to that of setting 1, and 20 of 0 to 598 are jackpot values (““ 7 ”to“ 26 ”).

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 4, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 528, and of 0 to 528, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 4, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 common to setting 1, and 20 of 0 to 598 are jackpot values (““ 7 ”to“ 26 ”).

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 508, and of 0 to 508, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 common to that of setting 1, and 20 of 0 to 598 are jackpot values (““ 7 ”to“ 26 ”).

In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 6, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability game state is 0 to 488, and of 0 to 488, two values (“7” and “8”) are jackpots. Is. Further, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 6, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 common to that of setting 1, and 20 of 0 to 598 are jackpot values (““ 7 ”to“ 26 ”).

As described above, in the game machine 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value is changed by setting, and is 0 to 598, 0 to 578, 0 to 548, 0 to 528, 0 to 508, 0 to 488. Therefore, the jackpot probabilities in the low probability gaming state are 1/599 (= 1 / 299.5), 1/579 (= 1 / 289.5), 1/549 (= 1 / 274.5), 1 It is one of / 529 (= 1 / 264.5), 1/509 (= 1 / 254.5), and 1/489 (= 1 / 244.5). On the other hand, the random number range in the high probability gaming state is not changed by the setting, and the winning probability of the jackpot is 20/599 (= 1 / 29.9) regardless of the setting. It is also possible to change the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state by fixing the random number range in the low probability with a large numerical value (for example, 65536) and changing the number of jackpot random number values by setting. In this case as well, it is desirable to fix the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state by fixing the number of jackpot random numbers in the high-probability gaming state. If the winning probability of the high-probability gaming state is changed depending on the setting, it becomes easy for the player to detect which setting is set, which is effective in preventing it.

The main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2 when the determination result in step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), and when the determination result in step S311-1 is lost (S311-1: 1). No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and stops the fluctuation stop symbol based on the special symbol random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number (“00” to “07”) corresponding to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation.

FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a big hit symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol random value, a special symbol type (big hit type), a stop symbol data, and a symbol designation command is a starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. Is stored separately for reference when the condition is satisfied and for reference when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

The symbol designation command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed after being changed.

The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used in the jackpot game end processing, when the jackpot symbol is determined in the special symbol stop processing, when the operation mode of the jackpot in the jackpot game processing is determined, and in the jackpot game end processing. It is referred to when determining the game state. Details will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designation command for a jackpot corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets this symbol designation command in the transmission data storage area for production (S311-3).

Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and obtains the game state information indicating the obtained game state. Stored in the game state buffer (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets the data of "00H" in the game state buffer as game state information. If the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set, the data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. If the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set, the data of "02H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. When both the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are set, the data of "03H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a loss symbol determination process. In the loss symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the stop symbol data of the lost stop symbol with reference to the loss symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for loss. In the loss symbol determination table, the set of the special symbol type, the stop symbol data, and the symbol designation command is referred to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied. 2 The special symbol display device 21 is stored separately from the reference when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designation command for loss corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets this symbol designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect (S311-6).

Returning to the description of FIG. 41. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, and the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery in step S311-1, and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312. Presence / absence of flag set, number of pending updates (U2) or (U1) in step S310-3 or step S310-6, jackpot random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, random value for reach determination , And the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is determined based on the combination of the random values for the fluctuation of the special figure.

There are two types of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one that is referred to when the first special symbol is changed and the other that is referred to when the second special symbol is changed. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when the first special symbol is changed. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when the second special symbol is changed.

Here, the game machine 1 can change the setting of the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state by the first special activation operation (FIG. 26 (A)), but the change of the first special symbol The variation pattern determination table that is sometimes referred to and the variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the second special symbol changes are common. Even if the variation pattern determination table to be referred to for each setting is different, the selection rate is shared in order to prevent the player from being able to detect which setting is set due to the difference in the selection rate of the variation pattern. It is desirable to leave it.

As a result, regardless of the setting, the selection rate of each reach → development effect at the time of jackpot fluctuation is fixed, and the selection rate of each reach → development effect at the time of loss fluctuation is also fixed. Therefore, since the fluctuation pattern selection rate is common for each setting, the more advantageous the setting of the winning probability is for the player, the higher the overall appearance rate of the reach → development effect can be. In addition, the more advantageous the setting of the winning probability is for the player, the higher the overall reliability of the reach → development effect can be increased.

However, the high probability of winning is common for each setting, and the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the first special symbol changes and the fluctuation pattern determination table referenced when the second special symbol changes are also common. Therefore, when the probability is high, it is difficult for the player to know which setting is set because the appearance rate and reliability of each reach → development effect do not change depending on the setting of the winning probability.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the special symbol type (big hit type), game state (time-saving game state or non-time-saving game state), number of holds, reach determination random value, special symbol variation random value, special The type of fluctuation pattern of the symbol, the fluctuation time, and the set of fluctuation start commands are stored. The variation start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of variation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. On the contrary, in the fluctuation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected.

For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45, the options of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) are the variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17. There are 7 types.

Fluctuation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 proceed from the establishment of reach to the development effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 11 is T1 (for example, T1 = 18000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 12 is T2 (for example, T2 = 20000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 13 is T3 (for example, T3 = 22000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 14 is T4 (for example, T4 = 40,000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 15 is T5 (for example, T5 = 42000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 16 is T6 (for example, T6 = 60,000 ms). The variation pattern 17 proceeds from the establishment of the reach to the full rotation reach effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 17 is T7 (T7 = 62000 ms). The magnitude relationship of the fluctuation times T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, and T7 is T1 <T2 <T3 <T4 <T5 <T6 <T7. Of the fluctuation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17, the magnitude relation of the selectivity of 6 types excluding the fluctuation pattern 17 is as follows: fluctuation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 < Fluctuation pattern 15 <Variation pattern 16

Further, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45, the special symbol 0 (loss), the non-time saving game state, the number of holdings 0 to 2, and the reach (the random value for reach determination is "70 to 99"). There are seven types of variation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, which correspond to the combination of. The fluctuation pattern 9 is a pattern (normal reach loss) that is lost without proceeding from the establishment of reach to the development production. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 9 is T9 (for example, T9 = 6000 ms). The magnitude relation of the selectivity of fluctuation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 is as follows: fluctuation pattern 9> fluctuation pattern 1> fluctuation pattern 2> fluctuation pattern 3> fluctuation pattern 4> fluctuation pattern 5> fluctuation pattern. It is 6.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern determination table of the special symbol is compared with the pre-judgment table (FIG. 39) shown above, in the pre-judgment table, the number of pending changes of the first special symbol (U1) and the second special symbol It is possible to search the corresponding data in the table without referring to the number of pending fluctuations (U2). On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination table, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the number of holdings of the change of the first special symbol (U1) and the number of holdings of the change of the second special symbol (U2) are not referred to. As long as it is not possible to search the corresponding data in the table. For this reason, in the pre-judgment table, although it is possible to determine the type of production of the development destination after the reach production, it is not possible to distinguish between "normal variation" and "shortening variation".

In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a generates a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312, and sets this fluctuation start command in the production transmission data storage area (S313).

Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of a flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and generates a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state. This game state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S314).

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110a puts the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the first special symbol display device 20 Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 (S317), and ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation processing. In FIG. 47, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, determines that if the special symbol time counter is 0, the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If not, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S320-2. If it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol change process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variation display data set in step S315, and sets the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 in the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20 or. 2 The stop symbol data for causing the special symbol display device 21 to stop and display is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S320-5), and ends the special symbol variation processing this time. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 48, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it determines that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the special symbol time counter sets the special symbol time counter. If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. In the time-saving game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. If the time saving game flag is not set in the time saving game flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3 as it is. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the time saving number of times (J) in the storage area is updated by -1, and the updated time saving number of times (J) is 0. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the time saving number (J) is 0, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the number of time reductions (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-3 with the time reduction game flag set in the time reduction game flag storage area.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. In this high-probability game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-4 as it is. High-probability game flag When the high-probability game flag is set in the storage area, the high-probability game count (X) in the high-probability game count (X) storage area is updated by -1, and the updated high probability is high. It is determined whether or not the number of games (X) is 0. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is 0, the process proceeds to step S330-4 after clearing the high-probability game flags set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the number of high-probability games (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to step S330-4 with the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of a flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state. Generate and set this game state specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lost one (S330-5). When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S330-6), and stops the special symbol this time. End the process. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol memory determination process in step S302, and the special symbol memory determination process is performed.

When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the game state, the number of high-probability games (X), and the number of time reductions (J) at that time (S330-11). Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the high-probability game flag storage area and the high-probability game number (X) storage area. .. Further, when the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the time-saving game flag storage area and the time-saving number of times (J) storage area.

After executing step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the jackpot opening / closing control table for 16R and the jackpot for 8R are large. The winning opening opening / closing control table and the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R are determined as reference destinations.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special game control table. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R. FIG. 50 (c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R.

In the special game control table, the set of the stop symbol data, the opening time, the table number of the reference destination grand prize opening open / close control table, and the ending time is stored for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R is 01, the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R is 02, and the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R is 02. It is 03.

The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 16R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to 16th rounds per 16R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened. The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 8R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to eighth rounds per 8R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened. The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 2R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to second rounds per 2R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened.

The main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot, and uses this opening designation command as production transmission data. Set in the storage area (S330-13).

The main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of jackpot based on the big winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets this start interval time in the special symbol time counter (S330-14). ), End the special symbol stop processing this time. In the special figure special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the jackpot game process in step S302, and the jackpot game process is performed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 51, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, determines that the opening is in progress if the number of rounds (R) is 0, and determines that the number of rounds (R) is open. If is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not in progress. When the main CPU 110a is in the opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not in progress (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop processing, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it determines that the start interval time has elapsed, and specially. If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-3. If it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, the operation has not been performed even once, and the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area is 0. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in this step S340-3 becomes 1.

After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this large winning opening opening / closing process, the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized in order to open the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. Set the energization data to be made. Further, the main CPU 110a obtains the opening time of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R) with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12. , Set this opening time in the special game timer counter.

After executing step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a round start command transmission determination process (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command according to the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area, and sets this round start command in the transmission data storage area for production. , End this jackpot game process.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. If the main CPU 110a determines that the ending is not in progress (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a is large when the energization data (the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c) is not set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is determined that the winning opening is closed, and when the energization data is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the large winning opening is not closed. When the main CPU 110a is closing the large winning opening (S340-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-8. If the grand prize opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in the special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to the large winning opening opening process in step S340-4, followed by the large winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determination process (S340). -5) is performed, and this jackpot game process is completed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process this time.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a is opened when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area reaches the specified number (9) or the opening time has elapsed. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied. Further, in the main CPU 110a, the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area has not reached the specified number (9), and the opening time has not elapsed. In this case, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-10. If it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the jackpot game process this time is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b, so that the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid is used. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and based on the current number of rounds (R), the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 Set the closing time to the special game timer counter. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed.

After executing step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game is completed (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a plays one round game when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area reaches the specified number (9). Judge that it is finished. Further, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area does not reach the specified number (9). Judge that it is not. When the main CPU 110a determines that one round game has been completed (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round game has not been completed (S340-11: No), the jackpot game process this time is ended.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area to 0.

After the execution of step S340-12, the main CPU 110a has the maximum number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area (specifically, the final of the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12). It is determined whether or not the number of rounds has been reached (S340-13).

When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has not reached the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340). -14), the jackpot game process this time is completed.

When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340-). 15).

After executing step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and generates an ending designation command according to the type of jackpot. This ending designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S340-16).

After executing step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines the end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time in the special game timer counter (S340-17).

When the main CPU 110a determines that the ending is in progress after the execution of step S340-17 or in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the end interval time has elapsed (S340-). 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0, and sets the special game timer counter to 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current jackpot game process.

When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data (S340-19), and ends the current jackpot game processing. In the special figure special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game end process. In FIG. 52, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

After the execution of step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game flag setting process (S350-2). In the high-probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end-time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1, the high-probability at the end of the special game. Determine the necessity of setting the game flag.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a setting table at the end of the special game. In the special game end setting table, there are stop symbol data, data indicating the stored contents of the game state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time-saving game state, data indicating the number of time-saving games, and data indicating the necessity of the high-probability game state. , And a set of data indicating the number of high-probability games are stored.

Specifically, in step S350-1, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games at the end of the special game ( X) The remaining number of fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

Specifically, in step S350-2, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times are set in the game count (X) storage area. If it is other than "03, 07", 0 times is set in the game count (X) storage area.

After the execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time saving game flag at the end of the special game. Determine the need for a set of.

Specifically, in step S350-3, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time reduction number of times setting process (S350-5). In the time reduction number setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the game number (J) at the end of the special game. The remaining number of fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

Specifically, in this step S350-4, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times are set in the game count (J) storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, 100 times is set in the game count (J) storage area.

After the execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and specifies the game state corresponding to the current game state. A command is generated, and this game state specification command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S350-6).

After executing step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end processing. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol memory determination process in step S302, and the special symbol memory determination process is performed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the details of the Fuzu Fuden control process. In FIG. 54, the main CPU 110a loads the normal-figure general-purpose processing data (S401). In the following step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data, and if the normal symbol normal electric processing data = 0, the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination processing, and the normal symbol general electric processing If the data = 1, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation processing, if the data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stop processing, and if the data = 3, the processing is transferred to the auxiliary game processing. Move the process.

The outline of the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol change process, the normal symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination process (process of normal symbol storage processing data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter is 1 or more. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is 0, the normal symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. When the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is 1 or more, the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is updated by -1, and then the second to second in the normal symbol hold storage area. 4 The data in the storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written in the 0th storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random value already written in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area is erased. After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and is based on the combination of the presence / absence of the flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area and the normal symbol random value in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. Then, the lottery result (win or lose) of the normal symbol lottery is determined, and the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds in the non-time saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the time saving game state) according to the lottery result is determined. decide.

FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The ordinary symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the normal symbol lottery judgment table, the set of the normal symbol random value and the lottery result (win or miss) of the normal symbol lottery is referred to in the non-time saving game state and in the time saving game state. It is stored separately.

Comparing the number of normal symbol judgment random values that are hit in the non-time saving game state and the number of normal symbol judgment random values that are hit in the time saving game state in this normal symbol lottery judgment table, the winning in the non-time saving game state is compared. While the normal symbol determination random value is only one (0), the normal symbol determination random value per hit in the time-saving game state is 65535 (0 to 65534). The random number range of the normal symbol determination random number value is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving game state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time-saving game state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

After determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol time counter and starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22, and 1 in the normal symbol processing data. To set.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing (processing when the normal symbol processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol fluctuation If it is determined that the time has not passed, the normal symbol change processing this time is terminated. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the normal symbol lottery result, and the predetermined normal symbol stop time is set in the normal symbol time counter. Figure Set 2 to the general electric processing data.

In the normal symbol stop processing (processing when the normal symbol processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0) and stops the normal symbol. If it is determined that the time has not passed, the normal symbol stop processing this time is terminated. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the normal symbol processing data, and if the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol, the normal symbol is set. Set 3 in the general electricity processing data.

In the auxiliary game processing (processing when the normal drawing processing data = 3), the main CPU 110a has the opening time of the second start port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the non-time saving game state). 3.5 seconds) is determined, the second starting port 15 is opened during this opening time, then the second starting port 15 is closed, and 0 is set in the normal power processing data.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control board 120 of the game machine 1. The main process is that a system reset has occurred from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 due to the start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, first special start operation, or second special start operation). It will be started as an opportunity.

In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of muting the sound, a process of returning the accessory, a process of displaying the color bar as a game standby image, and the like. The sub CPU 120a waits for the elapse of a predetermined waiting period while keeping the display image of the image display device 31 as the game standby image (FIG. 57), and the display image of the image display device 31 is an image in the customer waiting state (left symbol in the stopped state). (Image having 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R). This standby period is at least a longer time (for example, 8 seconds) than the time required from the power-on of the main control board 110 to the end of the initialization process (S10 in FIG. 29). Further, when the sub CPU 120a receives a command from the main control board 110 during the standby period, the sub CPU 120a performs processing according to the received command. The details of the initialization process will be described later.

When the display image of the image display device 31 becomes an image in the customer waiting state after the elapse of the waiting period in the initialization process, the player can play the game. After the initialization process is completed, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random value and the like. Further, in addition to the update processing of the random number value, the sub CPU 120a executes the timer interrupt processing every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of timer interrupt processing will be described later.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the initialization process (step S1000 of FIG. 55). In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a permits access to the sub RAM 120c (S1001). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs mute control processing (S1002). In the mute control process, the sub CPU 120a transmits a mute designation command for muting the output sound of the voice output device 32 to the image control board 150. When the image control board 150 receives the mute designation command, the gain of the sound signal on the image control board 150 is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits the accessory return designation command to the lamp control board 140 (S1003). Upon receiving the accessory return designation command, the lamp control board 140 returns the frame effect drive device (frame gimmick) 33a and the board surface effect drive devices 33b and 33c (board surface gimmick) to the initial positions.

Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a background music designation command for outputting the background music during startup to the image control board 150 (S1004). When the image control board 150 receives the background music designation command, the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 is set to the value of the starting setting volume from 0, and the sound output device 32 outputs the starting background music of this set volume. .. The background music during startup is BGM (Back Ground Music) played during the startup of the game machine 1 (during the period from when the power is turned on until when the game becomes playable).

Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the game standby image (color bar image) to the image control board 150 (S1005). Upon receiving this display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display the game standby image. As shown in FIG. 57, the game standby image is an arrangement of rectangular images having different densities of colors.

In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the waiting period has elapsed (S1006). If the standby period has not elapsed (S1006: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1007. When the waiting period has elapsed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1199.

In step S1007, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the power-on designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the power-on designation command is received (S1007: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1008. If the power-on designation command has not been received (S1007: No), the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1008, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the characters “power on” on the display image of the image display device 31 to the image control board 150. After that, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 58, when the image control board 150 receives the display designation command, the image control board 150 displays the characters "power on" in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

In step S1009, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the RAM clear designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the RAM clear designation command (S1009: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1010. If the RAM clear designation command has not been received (S1009: No), the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1010, the sub CPU 120a stores the initial value of the game state information (game state information in the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state) in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process returns to step S1006.

In step S1011, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the power restoration designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the power restoration designation command (S1011: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1012. If the power restoration designation command has not been received (S1011: No), the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1012, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In this game state setting process, when the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 1 designated command, the sub CPU 120a stores the game state information of the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state in the game state storage of the sub RAM 120c. Store in the area. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 2 designated command, the game state information of the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 3 designated command, the game state information of the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 4 designated command, the game state information of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the characters “power restoration” on the display image of the image display device 31 to the image control board 150 (S1013). After that, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 59, when the image control board 150 receives the display designation command, the image control board 150 displays the characters "power recovery" in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

In step S1014, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting change command has been received from the main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the setting change command (S1014: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1140. If the setting change command has not been received (S1014: No), the process proceeds to step S1015.

In step S1140, the sub CPU 120a performs the setting change notification image display control process. In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting change notification image (FIG. 61), and from the main control board 110 during the display of the setting change notification image. When a command is received, processing is performed according to the received command. Details of the setting change notification image display control process will be described later.

In step S1015, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting confirmation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the setting confirmation command (S1015: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1150. If the setting confirmation command has not been received (S1015: No), the process returns to step S1006.

In step S1150, the sub CPU 120a performs the setting confirmation notification image display control process. In the setting confirmation notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting confirmation notification image (FIG. 76), and from the main control board 110 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image. When a command is received, processing is performed according to the received command. Details of the setting confirmation notification image display control process will be described later.

In step S1199, the sub CPU 120a performs the customer waiting state transition process. In the customer waiting state transition process, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an image of the customer waiting state (an image having the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the stopped state), and the voice output device 32 Stops the output of background music during startup. After this, the game of the game machine 1 becomes possible.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change notification image display control process (step S1140 in FIG. 56). In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 60 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. ..

The sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the setting change mode flag is set in the setting change mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1141). The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating that the operation is performed in the setting change mode. If the setting change mode flag is not set (S1141: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1142. If the setting change mode flag is set (S1142: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1144.

Next, the sub CPU 120a sets the display designation command of the setting change notification image in the transmission buffer (S1142). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1148. Upon receiving this display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display the setting change notification image. As shown in FIG. 61, the setting change notification image has the characters "setting being changed" arranged in the center of the screen.

In the next step S1143, the sub CPU 120a sets the setting change mode flag in the setting change mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1144.

In step S1144, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If there is a command in the receive buffer (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1145. If there is no command in the receive buffer (S1144: No), the process proceeds to step S1148.

In step S1145, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a special command (command described as "special command" in FIG. 28). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146 when the command in the receive buffer is a special command (S1145: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is a game command (S1145: No), the process proceeds to step S1147.

In step S1146, the sub CPU 120a performs a special command analysis process during the setting change. The special command analysis process during setting change is a process of analyzing a special command in the receive buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the subRAM 120c. In step S1147, the sub CPU 120a performs a game command analysis process during the setting change. The game command analysis process during setting change is a process of analyzing the game command in the receive buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis process during setting change and the game command analysis process during setting change will be described later.

In step S1148, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the special command analysis process (step S1146 of FIG. 60) during setting change. In step S1146-1 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode in the receive buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself ("○" or "×"), and data indicating the necessity of deleting the setting change notification image after receiving the command. ("With erasure" or "Without erasure"), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when both the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed after receiving the command ("Upper right" or "" Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command while displaying the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 63, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The board 150 is made to change the contents of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the sound output device 32.

The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 63 are the setting change notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the special command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed in the setting change mode. It is designed to maintain the display of the image.

More specifically, in the record of the "full tank error command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". , The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "Dish full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-" (the data is not stored because the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command are not displayed together (the same applies to other "-"), and the necessity of stopping the background music is indicated. The data shown is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 64, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a plate full tank error command, the image control board 150 displays the setting change notification image. Maintain and display the full tank error command and the corresponding message image in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during startup is maintained, and the dish full tank error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the dish full tank error resolution command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command, and erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command, and the message sound corresponding to the dish full tank error command. Stops the output of.

Here, the situation where the command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 while the setting change notification image is displayed is when an error occurs at the time when the power of the main control board 110 is turned on or the main control board. This can occur if an error occurs after the 110 is powered on. Further, in such a situation, instead of the main control board 110, a debug-dedicated board or a factory-shipped board is connected to the effect control board 120, and the debug-dedicated board or the factory-shipped board is used to confirm the operation of the effect control board 120. (For example, a fluctuation start command for testing the behavior of the game machine 1 at the start of fluctuation, and a magnet detection error command for testing whether or not an illegal act can be reliably notified) is also transmitted. It can happen. It may also occur when the inspection personal computer is connected to the external command interface of the effect control board 120 and the operation confirmation command is transmitted from the inspection personal computer to the effect control board 120.

In the record of the "door opening error command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "door open error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a door opening error command. Then, the door open error command and the corresponding message image are superimposed on the word "Settings are being changed" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the door opening error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the door open error resolution command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. To stop.

In the record of the "magnet detection error command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of "Magnet detection error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command. Then, the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message image are superimposed on the word "Settings are being changed" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the magnet detection error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. To stop.

In the record of the "power-on designation command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power-on designation command. Then, the message image corresponding to the power-on specification command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music is stopped during startup.

In the record of the "power recovery designation command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is the power recovery designation command, the setting change notification image Is maintained, and the message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music is stopped during startup.

In step S1146-2 of FIG. 62, whether the sub CPU 120a "executes" the command execution necessity in the receive buffer based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity determination is Whether or not it is "○") is determined. When the necessity of executing the command in the receive buffer is "execute" (S1146-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-3. If "Do not execute" (S1146-2: No), the special command analysis process during the current setting change is terminated.

In step S1146-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-4 when the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" (S1146-3: Yes). If “no erasure” is selected (S1146-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1146-5.

In step S1146-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The erasure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives the erase designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

Here, in step S1146-4, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image, the setting change so as not to interfere with the visibility of the message image corresponding to the reception command is changed (specifically, the display mode of the notification image is changed (specifically). , The size of the setting change notification image is reduced, the display position of the setting change notification image is moved to the corner, the transparency of the setting change notification image is increased, and the display color of the setting change notification image is changed. A display mode change specification command for instructing (change) may be set. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of changing the content of the image display of the image display device 31 in the modified example in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1146-4. As shown in the example of FIG. 69, the image control board 150 has the size of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is a magnet detection error command. The image display mode is changed, such as making the image smaller and moving it to the lower left corner, so that the display area of the image corresponding to the receive command is left in the center of the screen.

In step S1146-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-6 when the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop" (S1146-5: Yes). If there is no stop (S1146-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1146-7.

In step S1146-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the background music stop designation command for stopping the background music in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

In step S1146-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer. Specifically, when the command in the receive buffer is an error command, the command to be set in the send buffer is displayed as a message image corresponding to the error command (for example, if the command is a full tank error command, "full tank error". ”) And the output of the message voice (for example, in the case of a plate full tank error command, the output of a warning sound“ Plate full tank error ”) shall be specified. If the command in the reception buff is an error resolution command, the command set in the transmission buffer shall specify the deletion of the message image being displayed and the stop of the message voice being output. The command set in the transmission buffer in step S1146-7 is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives a command, the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 and changes the output sound of the sound output device 32 according to the command.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the game command analysis process (step S1147 of FIG. 60) during setting change. In step S1147-1 of FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode in the receive buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself (“〇” or “×”), and data indicating the necessity of deleting the setting change notification image after receiving the command. ("With erasure" or "Without erasure"), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when both the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed after receiving the command ("Upper right" or "" Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a game command while displaying the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 71, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The board 150 is made to change the contents of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the sound output device 32.

The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 71 is the setting change notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the game command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed in the setting change mode. The image is erased to make it invisible.

More specifically, in the record of the "variation start command" in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the fluctuation start command, the image control board 150 has the setting change notification image on the image display device 31. Is deleted, and the fluctuation start command and the corresponding symbol fluctuation image are displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

In the record of the "starting prize designation command" in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the start prize designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image. Restrict the display of the production image corresponding to the start prize designation command. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the output of the production sound corresponding to the start prize designation command is regulated.

In the record of the "special game start command (opening designation command)" in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the image control board 150 is an image display device when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command). In 31, the setting change notification image is deleted, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the special game start command (opening designation command) and the corresponding effect sound are output.

In step S1147-2 of FIG. 70, whether the sub CPU 120a "executes" the command execution necessity in the receive buffer based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity determination is Whether or not it is "○") is determined. When the necessity of executing the command in the receive buffer is "execute" (S1147-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-3. If it is "not executed" (S1147-2: No), the game command analysis process during the current setting change is terminated.

In step S1147-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-4 when the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" (S1147-3: Yes). If “no erasure” is selected (S1147-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1147-5.

In step S1147-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The erasure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the game command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives the erase designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

Here, in step S1147-4, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image, a display mode for instructing a change in the display mode of the setting change notification image so as not to interfere with the visibility of the message image corresponding to the reception command. You may set the change specification command.

In step S1147-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-6 when the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop" (S1147-5: Yes). If there is no stop (S1147-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1147-7.

In step S1147-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the background music stop designation command for stopping the background music in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the game command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

In step S1147-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation notification image display control process (step S1150 in FIG. 56). In the setting confirmation notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 75 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. ..

The sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the setting confirmation mode flag is set in the setting confirmation mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1151). The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating that the operation is in the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode flag is not set (S1151: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1152. If the setting confirmation mode flag is set (S1152: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1154.

Next, the sub CPU 120a sets the display designation command of the setting confirmation notification image in the transmission buffer (S1152). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1158. Upon receiving this display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display the setting confirmation notification image. As shown in FIG. 76, the setting confirmation notification image has the characters "setting confirmation in progress" arranged in the center of the screen.

In the next step S1153, the sub CPU 120a sets the setting confirmation mode flag in the setting confirmation mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1154.

In step S1154, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. When the sub CPU 120a has a command in the receive buffer (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1155. If there is no command in the receive buffer (S1154: No), the process proceeds to step S1158.

In step S1155, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a special command (command described as "special command" in FIG. 28). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156 when the command in the receive buffer is a special command (S1155: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is a game command (S1155: No), the process proceeds to step S1157.

In step S1156, the sub CPU 120a performs a special command analysis process during setting confirmation. The special command analysis process during setting confirmation is a process of analyzing a special command in the receive buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the subRAM 120c. In step S1157, the sub CPU 120a performs the game command analysis process during the setting confirmation. The game command analysis process during setting confirmation is a process of analyzing the game command in the receive buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis process during setting confirmation and the game command analysis process during setting confirmation will be described later.

In step S1158, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the details of the special command analysis process (step S1156 of FIG. 75) during setting confirmation. In step S1156-1 of FIG. 77, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode in the receive buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself (“○” or “×”), and data indicating the necessity of deleting the setting confirmation notification image after receiving the command. ("With erasure" or "Without erasure"), Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when both the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed after receiving the command ("Upper right" or "" Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command while displaying the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 78, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The board 150 is made to change the contents of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the sound output device 32.

The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 78 are the setting confirmation notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the special command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. It is designed to maintain the display of the image.

More specifically, in the record of the "full tank error command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". , The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "Dish full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a dish full tank error command, the image control board 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image. Maintain and display the full tank error command and the corresponding message image in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during startup is maintained, and the dish full tank error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the dish full tank error resolution command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command, and erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command, and the message sound corresponding to the dish full tank error command. Stops the output of.

In the record of the "door opening error command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "door open error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a door opening error command. Then, the door open error command and the corresponding message image are superimposed on the word "Setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the door opening error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the door open error resolution command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. To stop.

In the record of the "magnet detection error command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of "Magnet detection error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command. Then, the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message image are superimposed on the word "Setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the magnet detection error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. To stop.

In the record of the "power-on designation command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the command received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image and is in the upper right corner of the screen. Display the message image corresponding to the power-on specification command. In this case, the output of the background music is stopped during startup.

In the record of the "power recovery designation command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "upper right", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power restoration designation command. Then, the power recovery specification command and the corresponding message image are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music is stopped during startup.

In step S1156-2 of FIG. 77, whether the sub CPU 120a "executes" the command execution necessity in the receive buffer based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity determination is Whether or not it is "○") is determined. When the necessity of executing the command in the receive buffer is "execute" (S1156-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-3. If "Do not execute" (S1156-2: No), the special command analysis process during the current setting confirmation is terminated.

In step S1156-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-4 when the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" (S1156-3: Yes). If "no erasure" is selected (S1156-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1156-5.

In step S1156-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The erasure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis process during the setting confirmation this time. When the image control board 150 receives the erase designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

Here, in step S1156-4, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image, the display mode is changed to instruct the change of the display mode of the game standby image so as not to interfere with the visibility of the message image corresponding to the reception command. You may set the specified command.

In step S1156-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. When the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop" (S1156-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-6. If “no stop” (S1156-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1156-7.

In step S1156-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the background music stop designation command for stopping the background music in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis process during the setting confirmation this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

In step S1156-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the details of the game command analysis process (step S1157 of FIG. 75) during setting confirmation. In step S1157-1 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode in the receive buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself ("○" or "×"), and data indicating the necessity of deleting the setting confirmation notification image after receiving the command ("With erasure" or "Without erasure"), Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when both the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed after receiving the command ("Upper right" or "" Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a game command while displaying the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 85, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The board 150 is made to change the contents of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the sound output device 32.

The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 85 is the setting confirmation notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the game command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. The image is erased to make it invisible.

More specifically, in the record of the "variation start command" in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the fluctuation start command, the image control board 150 has the setting confirmation notification image on the image display device 31. Is deleted, and the fluctuation start command and the corresponding symbol fluctuation image are displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

In the record of the "starting prize designation command" in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image. Restrict the display of the production image corresponding to the start prize designation command. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the output of the production sound corresponding to the start prize designation command is regulated.

In the record of the "special game start command (opening designation command)" in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, the image control board 150 is an image display device when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command). In 31, the setting confirmation notification image is deleted, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the special game start command (opening designation command) and the corresponding effect sound are output.

In step S1157-2 of FIG. 84, whether the sub CPU 120a "executes" the command execution necessity in the receive buffer based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity determination is Whether or not it is "○") is determined. When the necessity of executing the command in the reception buffer is "execute" (S1157-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-3. If "Do not execute" (S1157-2: No), the game command analysis process during the current setting confirmation is terminated.

In step S1157-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-4 when the necessity of image erasure is "with erasure" (S1147-3: Yes). If “no erasure” is selected (S1147-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1157-5.

In step S1157-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The erasure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analysis process during the setting confirmation this time. When the image control board 150 receives the erase designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

Here, in step S1157-4, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image, a display mode for instructing a change in the display mode of the setting confirmation notification image so as not to interfere with the visibility of the message image corresponding to the reception command. You may set the change specification command.

In step S1157-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-6 when the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop" (S1157-5: Yes). If “no stop” (S1157-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1157-7.

In step S1157-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the background music stop designation command for stopping the background music in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analysis process during the setting confirmation this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

In step S1157-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 89 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120 after the initialization process is completed and the game becomes possible. Execute a series of processes.

In FIG. 89, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d. Details of the timer update process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. The content of the effect by 34 is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect input control process (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs processing according to the input signals of the effect buttons 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, 39e of the center key 39E. The details of the effect input control process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the command analysis process in step S1600 and the effect input control process in step S1700.

Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis process (step S1600 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). When the sub CPU 120a has a command in the receive buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the receive buffer (S1601: No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a special symbol hold number designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is a special symbol hold number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the receive buffer is not a special symbol hold number designation command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol hold number update process. In the special symbol hold number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol hold number designation command, determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed. Set the corresponding special figure display number specification command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol hold number update process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect related to the appearance or erasure of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31. , 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1620, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621 when the command in the receive buffer is a start prize designation command (S1620: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is not the start prize designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning designation command storage process. In the start prize designation command storage process, the sub CPU 120a selects one of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c corresponding to the start prize designation command in the reception buffer. , The storage unit in which the data is not stored and has the smallest number in the first to fourth storage units of the selected effect information storage area is set as the data storage destination, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is used as the storage unit of the data storage destination. Remember in.

FIG. 38 (c) is a diagram showing an effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the effect information storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the fluctuation, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol, and the hold of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area is a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third storage unit corresponding to the third hold. And has a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (d), each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store the start prize designation command, the look-ahead effect effect scenario data, and the stage data of the new stage after the change in the stage change. It has become.

In FIG. 90, after the execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs the look-ahead effect effect selection process (S1622). In the look-ahead effect effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a sets the change of the symbol corresponding to the start prize designation command as the final variation of the start prize designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621 (FIG. 22). When determining the necessity of executing the look-ahead effect effect and executing the look-ahead effect effect, the scenario of the look-ahead effect effect up to the final fluctuation is determined, and the look-ahead effect effect scenario data indicating this scenario is applicable to the effect information storage area. It is stored in the storage part of. The details of the look-ahead effect effect selection process will be described later.

After executing step S1622, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change determination process (S1622). In the stage change determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stage change, and when the stage change is performed, whether the change is performed or the change in the hold at the time of the start winning is performed. It is decided, and preparatory processing for performing a stage change in the decided fluctuation is performed. The details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

In step S1624, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1624: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1624: No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1625, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change notice effect selection process. In the stage change notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stage change notice effect, and when executing the stage change notice effect, the stage change notice effect is performed at any timing before the stage change. It is decided, and the preparatory process for executing the stage change notice effect is performed at the decided timing. The details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

In step S1630, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a symbol designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the receive buffer is not a symbol specification command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol determination process, and ends the command analysis process this time after executing the effect symbol determination process. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command to determine the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and substituting the determined stop symbol numbers. A stop symbol designation command for storing the stop symbol number in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c and notifying the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 is generated, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol determination process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine the symbol combination at the time of stopping the fluctuation in the fluctuation.

In step S1640, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a fluctuation start command. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641 when the command in the receive buffer is the fluctuation start command (S1640: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is not a fluctuation start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670.

In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs the storage area shift process. In the storage area shift process, when data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth effects information storage areas. The data in the unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the data (starting prize designation command, look-ahead effect effect scenario data, stage data) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point is deleted. When no data is stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, the first effect information storage area is the first. The data in the 2nd to 4th storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the 1st storage unit of the 1st effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the data previously stored in the 0th storage unit is erased.

Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the look-ahead effect effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). When the look-ahead effect effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643. If the look-ahead effect effect scenario data is not stored in the effect information storage area (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead effect control process. In the look-ahead effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead effect effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not the look-ahead effect effect is to be executed in the fluctuation, and executes the look-ahead effect effect in the fluctuation. Generates an effect pattern specification command for the look-ahead effect effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the look-ahead effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command for the look-ahead effect effect, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the look-ahead effect effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect. Let the lighting device 34 execute.

Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644). When the stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1645. If the stage data is not stored in the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area (S1644: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change control process. In the stage change control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage data in the effect information storage area, and when the stage data is stored in the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area, performs a stage change in the fluctuation. Is determined, an effect pattern specification command instructing the stage change to the stage indicated by the stage data in the 0th storage unit is generated, and this effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command for the stage change, the image control board 150, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect change the stage according to the command. Let the lighting device 34 execute.

In step S1646, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a symbol variation effect pattern, which is a flow of effects related to the behavior of the effect symbol 36 and the movable accessories 330a, 330b, and 330c in the variation. In the variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 1, and determines the symbol variation effect pattern. Information is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table. In the variation effect pattern determination table, a set of an effect random value 1, a symbol variation effect pattern, and an effect pattern designation command is stored for each command corresponding to the variation start command.

For example, the symbol variation effect pattern 111 and the symbol variation effect pattern can be selected as the symbol variation effect pattern options corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T1) in which the MODE data is "E6H" and the DATA data is "11H". There are 112, a symbol variation effect pattern 113, a symbol variation effect pattern 114, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 111 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → lost reach effect (a series of effects of reach effect → temporary stop in a lost mode) → SP reach effect → jackpot notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 112 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → loss reach effect → battle effect (battle success) → jackpot notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 13 is a loss reach effect → a battle effect (battle failure) → a surprise operation effect → a jackpot notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 14 is a loss reach effect → an SP reach effect → an effect of temporarily stopping in a hit mode → a re-lottery effect → a jackpot notification effect (per 16R).

The symbol variation effect pattern 121, symbol variation effect pattern 122, and symbol variation effect pattern 121, which correspond to the fluctuation start command (16R probability variation, fluctuation time T2) with MODE data of "E6H" and DATA data of "12H", are available. There is a symbol variation effect pattern 123 and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 121 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → jackpot notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 122 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → lost reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → temporary stop effect in hit mode → re-lottery effect → jackpot notification effect (per 16R). .. The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 123 is as follows: loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → dialogue operation effect → temporary stop effect in hit mode → re-lottery effect → jackpot notification effect (per 16R). ..

There is a symbol variation effect pattern 141 as an option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (per 2R probability variation, variation time T3) in which the MODE data is "E6H" and the DATA data is "41H". The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 141 is as follows: loss reach effect → darkening effect → second movable accessory tilt effect → challenge effect → first movable accessory descent effect → challenge success effect → jackpot notification effect (per 2R). It has become.

The symbol variation effect pattern options corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T1) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "01H" include symbol variation effect pattern 011 and symbol variation effect pattern 012. .. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 011 is as follows: serif operation effect → loss reach effect → SP reach effect → loss notification effect. The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 012 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → loss reach effect → battle effect (battle failure) → loss notification effect.

The symbol variation effect pattern 014 is an option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T3) in which the MODE data is "E6H" and the DATA data is "03H". The flow of the pattern variation effect pattern 014 is as follows: loss reach effect → darkening effect → second movable accessory tilt effect → challenge effect → challenge effect effect → loss notification effect.

There is a symbol variation effect pattern 017 as an option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (loss, fluctuation time T10 (shortening variation)) in which the MODE data is "E6H" and the DATA data is "10H". The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 017 is a shortened variation effect → a loss notification effect.

Here, among the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table (FIG. 94), the dialogue operation effect is executed immediately after the start of the symbol variation (symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011). , 012, etc.) and those that execute the dialogue operation effect after the reach is established (symbol variation effect pattern 114, 123, etc.). With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the execution of the dialogue operation effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and also enables the execution of the dialogue operation effect after the reach is established.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the variation effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect produce a series of effects according to the command from the start to the end of the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation. The drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are used to execute the command.

In step S1647 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the SP reach effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the SP reach effect (S1647: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1648. If the SP reach effect is not included (S1647: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

In step S1648, the sub CPU 120a performs the SP specific advance notice effect selection process. In the SP specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the SP specific notice effect (FIG. 13 (c)) needs to be executed, and when the SP specific notice effect is executed, the execution timing of the SP specific notice effect is set. It is determined, an effect pattern specification command for instructing the execution of the SP specific advance notice effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the SP specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the SP specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the SP specific advance notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. Let 34 do it.

In step S1649, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the SPSP reach effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the SPSP reach effect (S1649: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1650. If the SPSP reach effect is not included (S1649: No), the process proceeds to step S1651.

In step S1650, the sub CPU 120a performs the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the SPSP specific advance notice effect (FIG. 13 (d)) needs to be executed, and when the SPSP specific advance notice effect is executed, the execution timing of the SPSP specific advance notice effect is set. It is determined, an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the SPSP specific advance notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. Let 34 do it.

In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the serif operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes a dialogue operation effect (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1652. If the dialogue operation effect is not included (S1651: No), the process proceeds to step S1656.

In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect operation result determination process. In the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the dialogue speaker and dialogue, which are the operation results of the dialogue operation effect, generates an effect pattern specification command for the dialogue operation effect according to this determination, and specifies the generated effect pattern. Set the command in the send buffer. The details of the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800.

In step S1653, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, is the dialogue of the sub RAM 120c. Set to the operation reception valid period start timer counter for operation production. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Set to. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a sets the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag in the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1655. The dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag is a flag indicating that the dialogue is waiting to be executed for the dialogue to appear in the dialogue operation effect.

In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect (FIG. 16 (d)) needs to be executed, and when the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed, the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed. The execution timing of is determined, an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process and the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the dialogue operation effect and the dialogue operation specific notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the like. And the effect lighting device 34 is executed.

In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the challenge effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes a challenge effect (S1656: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1657. If the challenge effect is not included (S1656: No), the process proceeds to step S1661.

In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the challenge effect is a challenge failure or a challenge success. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1658 when the challenge effect is a successful challenge (S1657: No). If the challenge effect is a challenge failure (S1657: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1661.

In step S1658, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation reception valid period of the challenge effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, is the challenge effect of the sub RAM 120c. Operation reception valid period start timer Set to the counter. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception valid period of the challenge effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the challenge effect of the sub RAM 120c. To do. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a sets the challenge effect (success) standby flag in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1660. The challenge effect (success) standby flag is a flag indicating that the challenge success effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1660, the sub CPU 120a sets the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1661. The first operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the first movable accessory 330a is waiting for the execution of the descending effect.

In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the surprise operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes a surprise operation effect (S1661: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1662. If the surprise operation effect is not included (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1665.

In step S1662, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation reception valid period of the surprise operation effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, is the surprise of the sub RAM 120c. Set to the operation reception valid period start timer counter for operation production. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception valid period of the surprise operation effect, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the surprise operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Set to. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

In step S1663, the sub CPU 120a sets the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1664. The surprise operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the surprise operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a sets the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1665.

In step S1665 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the shortened variation effect. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1666 when the shortened variation effect is included (S1665: Yes). If the shortened variation effect is not included (S1665: No), the process proceeds to step S1667.

In step S1666, the sub CPU 120a performs a shortening variation advance notice effect selection process. In the shortened variation notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the shortened variation notice effect (FIG. 19 (b)) needs to be executed, and when the shortened variation notice effect is executed, the execution timing of the shortened variation notice effect is set. It is determined, an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the shortened fluctuation notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a shortened fluctuation advance notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. Let 34 do it.

In step S1668, the sub CPU 120a performs a mode effect control process. In the mode effect control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode ends is necessary in the fluctuation if the special training mode effect is being executed, and when the special training mode effect ends, the special training mode end effect is performed. Generate an effect pattern specification command and set the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Details of the mode effect control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the mode effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the corresponding effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 according to the command. To execute.

In step S1669, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change notice effect control process during the symbol change. In the stage change notice effect control process during symbol change, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice effect is to be executed immediately after the start or stop of the current change display. When the sub CPU 120a is supposed to execute the stage change notice effect immediately after the start of the variable display, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command for the stage change notice effect and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. .. When the sub CPU 120a is supposed to execute the stage change notice effect immediately before the fluctuation display is stopped, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the timing immediately before the fluctuation display is stopped, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Set in the timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. The timer counter immediately before the stop of fluctuation is counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed, and becomes 0 at the timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change notice effect control process during symbol change is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a stage change notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. Let 34 do it.

In step S1670 of FIG. 93, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a fluctuation stop command. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671 when the command in the receive buffer is a fluctuation stop command (S1670: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is not a variable stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol stop processing. In the effect symbol stop process, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designation command for stopping the effect symbol 36, and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol stop processing will be described later.

The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect drive device 33a, 33c, and the effect related to the stop of the effect symbol 36 are displayed according to the command. The production lighting device 34 is executed.

In step S1672, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change notice effect control process while the symbol is stopped. In the stage change notice effect control process during symbol stop, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage is to be changed immediately after the stop of the current variation display. When the sub CPU 120a is supposed to change the stage immediately after the fluctuation display is stopped, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the stage change notice effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change notice effect control process during symbol stop is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a stage change notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. Let 34 do it.

In step S1680, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is a game state specification command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the receive buffer is not a game state specification command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs the game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer, obtains the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. ..

In step S1690, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is an opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the receive buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game effect selection process. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines the opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores the determined opening effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a decides to execute the rank-up effect (FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b)) in the fourth round when the opening designation command is per 8R probability variation or 8R normal per. The rank-up effect execution data indicating the content of the rank-up effect is stored in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the special game production selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the opening effect of the special game on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting according to the command. Let device 34 execute.

In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a round start command. When the command in the receive buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693. If the command in the receive buffer is not a round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs a round effect control process. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer, and whether or not this round is the execution round of the rank-up effect (4th round per 8R probability variation or 8R normal). To judge. Based on this determination result, the sub CPU 120a determines the effect pattern of this round, stores the determined effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates an effect pattern designation command for this effect pattern. , Set the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Details of the round effect control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a round effect of the special game on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting according to the command. Let device 34 execute.

In step S1694, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is an ending designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the receive buffer is not the ending specification command (S1694: No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game end effect control process, and proceeds to step S1696. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer, determines the ending effect pattern, and stores the determined effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the determined effect pattern, and sets this effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. Further, the sub CPU 120a clears any flags set during the special game.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the ending effect of the special game on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting according to the command. Let device 34 execute.

In step S1696, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of the completed special game is a normal hit or a probability variation hit. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a normal hit (S1696: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1697. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a probabilistic hit (S1696: No), the process proceeds to step S1698.

In step S1697, the sub CPU 120a performs the special training mode start control process. In the special training mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the special training mode in the transmission buffer. Details of the special training mode start control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special training mode start control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the effect of the special training mode on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. Let 34 do it.

In step S1698, the sub CPU 120a performs the live mode start control process. In the live mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets the live mode effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. Details of the live mode start control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the live mode start control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a live mode effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. Let 34 do it.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the details of the look-ahead effect effect selection process (step S1622 of FIG. 90). In FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a sets the hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area that stores the start prize designation command in the start prize designation command storage process as the look-ahead determination target hold, and the variation of this look-ahead determination target hold develops. It is determined whether or not the variation has an effect (S1622-1). When the sub CPU 120a is a variation having a development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a variation having a development effect (S1622-1: No), the pre-reading effect effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a variation having a development effect in the hold in which the change order is earlier than the look-ahead determination target hold. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3 when there is no variation having a development effect (S1622-2: No). When there is a variation having a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the pre-reading effect effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the look-ahead effect effect execution determination process. In the look-ahead effect effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the pre-reading effect effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and pre-reads based on the combination of the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the pre-reading determination target hold and the effect random value value 2. Determines the necessity of executing the effect effect.

FIG. 96A is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect effect execution judgment table, the set of the random value 2 for the effect and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the reference when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, 60 (0 to 59) effect random values 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead effect effect is executed, and 40 (60 to 99) effects are used. The random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the look-ahead effect effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 40 (0 to 39) effect random values 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead effect effect is executed, and 60 (40 to 99) effect random values 2 are pre-read. It is associated with data indicating that the effect effect is not executed.

In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the look-ahead effect effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is "execute" (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1622-4: No), the pre-reading effect effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead effect final stage determination process. In the look-ahead effect final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage effect display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and is based on the combination of the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead determination target hold and the effect random value value 3. The display mode of the hold display image 37 at the final stage in the look-ahead effect effect is determined.

FIG. 96B is a diagram showing a final stage effect display mode determination table. In the final stage effect display mode determination table, a set of data indicating the effect of the final stage ("blue", "green", and "red") and the random value 3 for production is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. It is memorized separately for what to do and what to refer to when losing. Specifically, for the jackpot, 10 (0 to 9) production random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the "blue effect", and 30 (10 to 39) production random values 3 Is associated with the data indicating the "green effect", and 60 (40 to 99) effect random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the "red effect". Regarding the loss, 60 (0 to 59) production random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the "blue effect", and 30 (60 to 89) production random values 3 are the "green effect". Is associated with the data indicating "red effect", and 10 (90 to 99) effect random values 3 are associated with the data indicating "red effect".

In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination process. In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and indicates the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead judgment target hold, the final stage effect, the number of holds, and the random value for the effect. The look-ahead effect effect scenario is determined based on the combination of 4.

There are two types of look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, one that is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit and the other that is referred to when the pre-judgment result is lost. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big hit. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is lost.

In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, a set of the effect random value 4 for the effect and the look-ahead effect effect scenario data is stored for each corresponding combination of the effect and the number of reservations at the final stage of the look-ahead effect effect. In the jackpot look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (Fig. 97) and the loss look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (Fig. 98), the effect random value 4 for the effect look-ahead effect effect scenario ER39 and ER49 called "falling down" The presence or absence of allocation is different.

More specifically, in this table, there is a look-ahead effect effect scenario EB11 as an option corresponding to the combination of blue and one hold number. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EB11 is a scenario in which the blue effect appears in the final fluctuation. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenario EB11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations include the look-ahead effect effect scenario EB21 and EB22. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios EB21 and EB22 are scenarios in which the times when the blue effect appears are different. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenario EB21 is associated with 70 (0 to 69) effect random values 4, and the look-ahead effect effect scenario EB22 is associated with 30 (70 to 99) effect random values 4. ..

Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations 3 include look-ahead effect effect scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EB31, EB32, and EB33 are scenarios in which the time when the blue effect appears is different. 20 to 50 effect random values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33, respectively. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations 4 include the look-ahead effect effect scenario EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44 are scenarios in which the time when the blue effect appears is different. The look-ahead effect effect effects scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44 are associated with 10 to 40 effect random values 4.

A look-ahead effect effect scenario EG11 is an option corresponding to the combination of green and one hold number. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG11 is a scenario in which the green effect appears in the final fluctuation. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenario EG11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations are the look-ahead effect effect scenario EG21 and EG22. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG21 and EG22 are scenarios in which the time when the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect before reaching the time are different. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG21 is associated with 70 (0 to 69) effect random values 4, and the look-ahead effect effect scenario EG22 is associated with 30 (70 to 99) effect random values 4. ..

The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG31 to EG38 is an option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations of three. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG31 to EG38 are scenarios in which the time when the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect before reaching the time are different. The look-ahead effect effect effects scenarios EG31 to EG38 are associated with 5 to 20 effect random values 4. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG41 to EG48 is an option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations of 4. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG41 to EG48 are scenarios in which the time when the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect before reaching the time are different. The look-ahead effect effect effects scenarios EG41 to EG48 are associated with 5 to 20 effect random values 4.

A look-ahead effect effect scenario ER11 is an option corresponding to the combination of red and one hold number. The look-ahead effect effect scenario ER11 is a scenario in which the red effect appears in the final fluctuation. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenario ER11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations 2 include look-ahead effect effect scenario ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24 are scenarios in which the time when the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect and the green effect before reaching the time are different. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24 are associated with 10 to 40 effect random values 4, respectively.

There are look-ahead effect production scenarios ER31 to ER39 as options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations of three. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER39 are scenarios in which the time when the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect and the green effect before reaching the time are different. Here, the look-ahead effect production scenarios ER31 to ER38 are "upstart" scenarios in which an effect of a color having a higher reliability than that of the previous fluctuation appears in the later fluctuation, such as blue → green → red. On the other hand, the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario ER39 is a “fall-down” scenario in which an effect of a color having a lower reliability than that of the previous fluctuation appears in the later fluctuation, such as green → red → green. In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER38, and 1 (99) effect random values are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER39. The numerical value 4 is associated with it. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER38. Further, in the loss table, the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario ER39 is not associated with any effect random value 4.

There are look-ahead effect production scenarios ER41 to ER49 as options corresponding to the combination of red and four pending numbers. The look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER49 are scenarios in which the time when the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect and the green effect before reaching the time are different. Of the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER41 to ER49, the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER41 to 48 is a “upstart” scenario, and the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER49 is a “downstart” scenario. In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48, and 1 (99) effect random values are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER49. The numerical value 4 is associated with it. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48. Further, in the loss table, the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario ER49 is not associated with any effect random value 4.

In this way, in the game machine 1, for the combination of red and 3 hold numbers and the combination of red and 4 hold numbers, the pre-reading effect effect scenario ER39 and ER49 of "falling down" can be selected only from the jackpot table. It has become. For this reason, in the game machine 1, the pre-reading effect effect of "falling down" is the final variation jackpot confirmation effect (the effect of notifying that the final variation will be a jackpot before the symbol of the final variation is stopped).

In step S1622-7 of FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determined in the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

Here, in the pre-reading effect effect selection process, when there is a development effect in the pre-reading determination target hold and there is no development effect in the previous hold in the order of variation (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No), the pre-reading effect effect is selected. Effect effect execution judgment processing is performed. Due to such a processing flow, when the effect pre-reading effect effect is executed, the effect control board 120 causes the development effect to be executed as the effect during the display of the change in the final variation of the pre-reading effect effect, and the final variation of the pre-reading effect effect. It regulates that the development effect is executed as the effect during the variation display before.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect symbol determination process (step S1631 of FIG. 90). In FIG. 99, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the fluctuation stops at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1). When the fluctuation stops at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631-2. If the fluctuation does not stop at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1631-3.

In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the winning jackpot type, and in the selected symbol combination. The four stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the loss, and the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination, The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the four determined stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1631-5, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol designation command for notifying the four determined stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing details of the SP specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1648 of FIG. 90). In FIG. 100, the sub CPU 120a performs the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1648-1). In the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the SP specific advance notice effect is to be executed based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 5.

FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an SP specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the SP specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 5 and execution is to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The jackpot lottery result is stored separately from the one to be referred to when the result is lost. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, data indicating that 5 (0 to 4) production random values 5 execute the SP specific advance notice production and 95 (5 to 99) productions are used. The random number value 5 is associated with the data indicating that the SP specific advance notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot lottery result is lost, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 5 are associated with data indicating that the SP specific advance notice effect is not executed.

In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1648-2: No), the SP specific advance notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1648-4. In the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the SP specific advance notice effect based on the effect random number value 6.

FIG. 101B is a diagram showing an SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 6 and the SP specific advance notice effect timing data is stored.

Specifically, the options of this table include SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11 and SPY12. The SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11 executes the SP specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY12 executes the SP specific advance notice effect during the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation.

In this table, the SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11 is associated with three (0 to 2) effect random values 6. 97 (3 to 99) effect random values 6 are associated with the SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY12.

In step S1648-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the SP specific advance notice effect at the timing determined in the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1648-4, the execution timing of the SP specific advance notice effect specified by the command (immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation or during the normal fluctuation). In, the SP specific advance notice effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34.

Here, the SP specific advance notice effect selection process is not executed when the SP reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation (step S1647: No in FIG. 91). Further, in the table (FIG. 101 (a)) referred to in the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1648-1 of FIG. 100) in the SP specific advance notice effect selection process, the SP specific advance notice when the big hit lottery result is a big hit. The selection rate of the data indicating that the effect is executed is 5%, and the selection rate of the data indicating that the SP specific notice effect is executed when the jackpot lottery result is lost is 0%. Due to such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 can perform the SP specific advance notice effect when the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed after the loss reach effect during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to restrict the execution, and when the jackpot notification effect is executed after the loss reach effect and then the SP reach effect, the SP specific advance notice effect can be executed.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing details of the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1650 of FIG. 91). In FIG. 102, the sub CPU 120a performs the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1650-1). In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the SPSP specific advance notice effect is to be executed based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 7.

FIG. 103A is a diagram showing an SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 7 and execution is to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The jackpot lottery results are stored separately for reference when the result is lost. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, data indicating that 5 (0 to 4) production random values 7 execute the SPSP specific advance notice production and 95 (5 to 99) productions are used. The random number value 7 is associated with the data indicating that the SPSP specific advance notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot lottery result is lost, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 7 are associated with data indicating that the SPSP specific advance notice effect is not executed.

In step S1650-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1650-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1650-2: No), the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1650-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1650-4. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the SPSP specific advance notice effect based on the effect random number value 8.

FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing an SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 8 and the effect pattern of the SPSP specific advance notice effect is stored.

Specifically, the options of this table include SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY21, SPY22, and SPY23. The SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY21 executes the SP specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY22 executes the SPSP specific advance notice effect during the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY23 executes the SPSP specific advance notice effect during the SP reach effect of the fluctuation.

In this table, the SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY22 is associated with three (0 to 2) effect random values 8. 97 (3 to 99) effect random values 8 are associated with the SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY23. The SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY21 is not associated with any effect random number value 8.

In step S1650-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect at the timing determined in the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1650-4, the execution timing of the SPSP specific advance notice effect specified by the command (immediately after the start of the change, during normal change, or , SP reach effect), the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the SPSP specific notice effect.

Here, the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process is not executed when the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation (step S1649: No in FIG. 91). Further, in the table (FIG. 103 (a)) referred to in the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1650-1 in FIG. 102) in the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process, the SPSP specific advance notice when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The selection rate of the data indicating that the effect is executed is 5%, and the selection rate of the data indicating that the SPSP specific notice effect is executed when the jackpot lottery result is lost is 0%. Due to such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 can perform the SPSP specific advance notice effect when the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed after the loss reach effect during the variable display of the special symbol. It regulates the execution, and when the jackpot notification effect is executed after the loss release effect and then the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP specific notice effect can be executed.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process (step S1652 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 104, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue speaker determination process (S1652-1). In the dialogue speaker determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue speaker determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the character to be the dialogue speaker based on the effect random number value 9.

FIG. 105A is a diagram showing a dialogue speaker determination table. In the dialogue speaker determination table, a set of the effect random number value 9 and the characters A, B, C, and D is stored. Specifically, 25 effect random values 9 are associated with each of the characters A, B, C, and D.

In step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue determination process. In the dialogue determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the dialogue based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 10.

FIG. 105B is a diagram showing a dialogue determination table. In the dialogue determination table, each set of the production random number value 10 and the dialogue is stored separately for reference when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot and reference when the jackpot lottery result is lost. ..

Specifically, in the case where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, 50 (0 to 49) directing random values 10 for "It's intense heat" and 50 (50 to 99) for "Chance". The effect random value 10 is associated with each other. No single random number value 10 for production is associated with "...". If the jackpot lottery result is lost, 34 (0 to 33) production random values 10 for "It's intense heat" and 33 (34 to 66) production random values for "Chance". 10 and 33 (67 to 99) production random values 10 are associated with "...", respectively.

In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the operation result corresponding to the combination of the character determined in the dialogue speaker determination process and the dialogue determined in the dialogue determination process, and generates the generated effect pattern specification command. Set in the send buffer.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1652-3, they wait for the effect button 36 to be operated in the dialogue operation effect, and immediately after the operation of the effect button 36. The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the effect of the operation result specified by the command.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1655 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 106, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1655-1). In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect needs to be executed based on the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect and the effect random value 11 within the fluctuation. judge. Here, as described above, among the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table, the dialogue operation effect is executed immediately after the start of the symbol variation (symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011 and 012, etc.) and those that execute the dialogue operation effect after the reach is established (design variation effect pattern 114, 123, etc.). When the symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011 and 012 are determined in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1646 of FIG. 91), the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is immediately after the start of the variation, and the symbol When the variable effect patterns 114, 123, etc. are determined, the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is after the reach is established.

FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 11 and execution is displayed immediately after the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect starts to change. It is memorized separately for what is referred to at a certain time and what is referred to when the reach is established. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 11 are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. No single random number value 11 for effect is associated with the data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed. After the reach is established, 30 (0 to 29) effect random values 11 indicate that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed, and 70 (30 to 99) effect random values 11 are dialogue operations. It is associated with data indicating that the specific advance notice effect is not executed.

In step S1655-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1655-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1655-2: No), the present dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process ends.

In step S1655-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1655-4. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value value 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the dialogue in the dialogue determination processing (S1652-2 in FIG. 104) in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination processing, and the effect disturbance. Based on the numerical value 12, the production pattern of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is determined.

FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table, the set of the effect random value value 12 and the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data is referred to when the dialogue is "...", when "it's a chance". It is memorized separately for what is referred to in and what is referred to when "it's intense heat".

Specifically, the options of this table include dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11, SRY12, and SRY13. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11 executes the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY12 executes the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect during the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY13 executes the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect after the reach of the fluctuation is established. Regarding "It's intense heat", 40 (0 to 39) directing random values 12 are in the dialogue operation specific advance notice production timing data SRY12, and 60 (40 to 99) are in the dialogue operation specific advance notice production timing data SRY13. The effect random value 12 is associated with each other. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11 is not associated with any effect random value 12. Regarding "chance", 50 (0 to 49) random value values for production are in the dialogue operation specific advance notice production timing data SRY12, and 50 (50 to 99) in the dialogue operation specific advance notice production timing data SRY13. The effect random value 12 of is associated with each other. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11 is not associated with any effect random value 12. Regarding "...", 90 (0 to 89) directing random values 12 are produced in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY12, and 10 (90 to 99) are produced in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY13. Random values 12 are associated with each other. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11 is not associated with any effect random value 12.

In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing the execution of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect at the timing determined in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and generates the generated effect pattern designation command. Set in the send buffer.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1655-4, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the voice output device 32, perform the dialogue operation specific notice effect at the timing specified by the command. The effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

Here, as shown in FIG. 16, the dialogue operation effect is an operation promotion effect (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the operation reception validity period, and an image of "press!"). , The operation result effect (the effect that the character A, B, C, or D appears and the dialogue is displayed in the balloon frame) that progresses from there. In the table (FIG. 107 (a)) referred to in the specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1655-1) in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol. The selection rate of the data indicating that the dialogue specific advance notice effect is executed in the case is 0%, and the data indicating that the dialogue specific advance notice effect is executed when the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is after the reach is established. The selection rate of is 30%. Further, in the table (FIG. 107 (b)) referred to in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process (S1655-3), when the dialogue which is the operation result is "...", it is "chance". And, in the case of "It's intense heat", the selection rate of the data in which the execution timing of the dialogue operation specific notice effect is immediately after the start of the fluctuation is 0%. Due to such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect control board 120 can execute only the operation promotion effect without the advance notice effect of specifying the dialogue operation, and at the timing other than immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the dialogue operation is specified. It is possible to execute both the operation promotion effect with the advance notice effect and the operation promotion effect without the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the details of the shortened variation advance notice effect selection process (step S1666 of FIG. 92). In FIG. 108, the sub CPU 120a performs a shortening fluctuation advance notice effect execution determination process (S1666-1). In the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value value 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the shortened variation advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the shortened variation notice effect is executed based on the effect random number value 13.

FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing a shortened variation notice effect execution determination table. The shortened fluctuation notice effect execution determination table stores a set of data indicating the effect random value 13 and the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of execution. Specifically, data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random value values 13 execute the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect, and 70 (30 to 99) effect random value values 13 are shortened variation advance notice effects. Is associated with the data indicating that the above is not executed.

In step S1666-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the shortened variation advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1666-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1666-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1666-2: No), the shortening variation notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1666-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the shortening variation advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1666-4. In the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the shortened variation advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the shortened variation notice effect based on the effect random number value 14.

FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing a shortened fluctuation advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the shortened fluctuation notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 14 and the shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data is stored.

Specifically, the options of this table include shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY11, TSY12, and TSY13. The shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY11 executes the shortened fluctuation notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY12 executes the shortened fluctuation notice effect during the fluctuation of the fluctuation (later than immediately after the start of the fluctuation and earlier than immediately before the stop of the fluctuation). The shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY13 executes the shortened fluctuation notice effect immediately before the fluctuation of the fluctuation is stopped. The shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY12 corresponds to 90 (0 to 89) effect random values 14, and the shortened variation advance notice effect timing data TSY13 corresponds to 10 (90 to 99) effect random values 14. It is attached. The shortened fluctuation notice effect timing data TSY11 is not associated with any effect random value 14.

In step S1666-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the shortened variation advance notice effect at the timing determined in the shortened variation advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1666-4, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect produce a shortened fluctuation notice effect at the timing specified by the command. The drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are used to execute the command.

Here, in the table (FIG. 109 (b)) referred to in the shortened variation notice effect execution timing determination process (S1666-3) in the shortened variation notice effect selection process, the execution timing of the shortened variation notice effect is set to immediately after the start of the fluctuation. The data selection rate is 0%. Due to such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the shortened variation notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 regulates that the shortened variation notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and executes the shortened variation notice effect at a timing other than immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the details of the loss notice effect selection process (step S1667 of FIG. 92). In FIG. 110, the sub CPU 120a performs the disconnection notice effect execution determination process (S1667-1). In the loss notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the disengagement notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the disengagement notice effect is executed based on the effect random number value 15.

FIG. 111A is a diagram showing a loss notice effect execution determination table. In the out-of-order notice effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 15 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) are lost to those referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. It is stored separately from the one referred to at the time. Specifically, the jackpot is associated with data indicating that 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 15 are out of order and the advance notice effect is not executed. No effect random number value 15 is associated with the data indicating that the loss notice effect is executed. Regarding the loss, the data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random values 15 are to be executed for the notice effect and 70 (30 to 99) effect random values 15 are not to be executed. It is associated with the data indicating that.

In step S1667-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the disconnection notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1667-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1667-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1667-2: No), the current loss notice effect selection process ends.

In step S1667-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the disconnection notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1667-4. In the loss notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the release notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the loss notice effect based on the presence / absence of reach establishment in the fluctuation and the effect random value value 16.

FIG. 111B is a diagram showing a loss notice effect execution timing determination table. In the out-of-order notice effect execution timing determination table, the set of the out-of-order advance notice effect timing data with the effect random value 16 is referred to when the change does not establish reach (either normal change or shortened change). Fluctuations are stored separately for reference when reach is established.

Specifically, the options of this table include the missed notice effect timing data HZY11, HZY12, HZY13, and HZY14. The missed notice effect timing data HZY11 executes the missed notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The missed notice effect timing data HZY12 executes the missed notice effect during the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation. The missed notice effect timing data HZY13 executes the missed notice effect after the reach of the fluctuation is established. The missed notice effect timing data HZY14 executes the missed notice effect immediately before the fluctuation of the fluctuation is stopped. Regarding the absence of reach, 90 (0 to 89) directing random values 16 are stored in the loss notice effect timing data HZY12, and 10 (90 to 99) directing random values 16 are stored in the missed notice effect timing data HZY14. Each is associated. The out-of-order notice effect timing data HZY11 and HZY13 are not associated with any effect random value 16. Regarding the presence of reach, two (0 to 1) production random values 16 are stored in the loss notice effect timing data HZY12, and two (2 to 3) production random values 16 are stored in the loss notice effect timing data HZY13. 96 (4 to 99) effect random values 16 are associated with the loss notice effect timing data HZY14. No single random number value 16 for effect is associated with the loss notice effect timing data HZY11.

In step S1667-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command instructing the execution of the detached notice effect at the timing determined in the detached notice effect execution timing determination process, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. To do.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1667-4, at the timing specified by the command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect The drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are used to execute the command.

Here, in the table (FIG. 111 (b)) referred to in the loss notice effect execution timing determination process (S1667-3) in the loss notice effect selection process, data selection in which the execution timing of the loss notice effect is immediately after the start of fluctuation. The rate is 0%. Due to the flow of processing and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the shift notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 regulates that the deviation notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and executes the deviation notice effect at a timing other than immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the details of the mode effect control process (step S1668 of FIG. 92). In FIG. 112, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode execution flag is set in the special training mode execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1668-1). When the special training mode execution flag is set (S1668-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-2. If the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1668-1: No), the mode effect control process this time is terminated. The special training mode executing flag is a flag indicating that the special training mode is being executed. When the special training mode execution flag is won, the special training mode execution flag is set in step S1697-2 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control process (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game.

In step S1668-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c is 0. When the special training mode remaining number counter is not 0 (S1668-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-3. When the special training mode remaining count counter is 0 (S1668-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1668-4. When the special training mode remaining number counter is won, 100 is set in step S1697-3 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control process (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game.

In step S1668-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the special training mode remaining number counter by -1. After that, the mode effect control process this time is finished.

In step S1668-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the special training mode end effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1668-5, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode execution flag in the special training mode execution flag storage area. After that, the mode effect control process this time is finished.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1668-4, the special training mode end effect is output to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and the effect. 33c and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the details of the stage change determination process (step S1623 of FIG. 90). In FIG. 113, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1). If the game state information in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c is a non-time-saving game state and a low-probability game state, the determination result of this step is "Yes". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632-2 when the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1: Yes). When the current game mode is either the special training mode or the live mode (S1623-1: No), the stage change determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1623-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the start prize designation command stored in the effect information storage area in the start prize designation command storage process is for the lost prize information. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-3 when the start prize designation command is for the lost prize information (S1623-2: Yes). If the start prize designation command is for the jackpot prize information (S1623-2: No), the stage change determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1623-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. If the stage change notice standby flag is not set (S1623-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1623-4. When the stage change notice standby flag is set (S1623-3: Yes), the stage change determination process this time is terminated. The stage change notice waiting flag is a flag indicating that the stage change notice waiting effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1623-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not everything in the hold is lost. If all of the start prize designation commands in the storage unit of the effect information storage area are for the lost prize information, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If there is a jackpot winning information among the start winning winning designation commands in the storage unit of the effect information storage area, the determination result of this step is "No". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-5 when everything in the hold is lost (S1623-4: Yes). When there is a big hit in the hold (S1623-4: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the stage change determination process this time.

In step S1623-5, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change execution determination process. In the stage change execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 17 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the stage change needs to be executed based on the number of fluctuations from the previous stage change and the effect random value 17.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table. In the stage change execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) and the random value 17 for production has changed from 0 to 9 times since the previous stage change. It is divided into those that are sometimes referred to, those that are referred to when the number of fluctuations from the previous stage change is 10 to 19 times, and those that are referred to when the number of fluctuations from the previous stage change is 20 or more. It is remembered. In this table, the greater the number of fluctuations since the previous stage change, the easier it is to select data indicating that the stage change will be executed. Specifically, for 0 to 9 times, 20 (0 to 19) production random values 17 are associated with data indicating that the stage change is executed, and 80 (20 to 99). The effect random value is associated with data indicating that the stage change is not executed. For 10 to 19 times, 50 (0 to 49) production random values 17 are associated with data indicating that the stage change is executed, and 50 (50 to 99) production random values 17 are associated with each other. Is associated with data indicating that does not perform a stage change. For 20 times or more, 80 (0 to 79) effect random values 17 are associated with data indicating that the stage change is executed, and 20 (80 to 99) effect random values 17 are associated with each other. It is associated with data indicating that the stage change is not executed.

In step S1623-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1623-6: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-7. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1623-6: No), the stage change determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1623-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the stage change standby flag in the stage change standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1623-8.

In step S1623-8, the sub CPU 120a performs a new stage determination process. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 18 updated in step S1100. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the new stage determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines the new stage based on the effect random number value 18.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a new stage determination table. In the new stage determination table, a random number value 18 for production and each set of stage data indicating the new stage after the change in the stage change are stored for each set corresponding to the current stay stage.

Specifically, if the current stage is the marine stage, the options are the savanna stage and the cosmo stage, and if the current stage is the savanna stage, the options are the marine stage and the cosmo stage, and the current stage. In the case of the Cosmo stage, there are marine stage and savanna stage. Each option is associated with 50 effect random values 18.

In step S1623-9, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing determination process is a process for determining whether the stage change is to be performed based on the change or the change in hold. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 19 updated in step S1100. In the stage change timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the stage change timing based on the number of pending changes of the first special symbol and the effect random value value 19. ..

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a stage change timing determination table. In the stage change timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 19 and the stage change timing data is stored for each corresponding number of changes in the first special symbol.

Stage change timing data STC10 is an option corresponding to the number of holdings of 0. The stage change timing data STC10 indicates that the stage change is executed in the fluctuation. The stage change timing data STC10 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 19.

There are stage change timing data STC10 and STC11 as options corresponding to one hold number. The stage change timing data STC11 indicates that the stage is changed after the fluctuation digestion has progressed to the fluctuation of the first hold at the execution time (starting winning time) of the stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing data STC10 is associated with 50 (0 to 49) production random values 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 is associated with 50 (50 to 99) production random values 19. ing.

The options corresponding to the two hold numbers include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, and STC12. The stage change timing data STC12 indicates that the stage is changed after the fluctuation digestion has progressed to the fluctuation of the second hold at the execution time (starting prize time) of the stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing data STC10 contains 34 (0 to 33) production random values 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 contains 33 (34 to 66) production random values 19. 33 (67 to 99) effect random values 19 are associated with the STC12, respectively.

The options corresponding to the three hold numbers include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, and STC13. The stage change timing data STC13 indicates that the stage is changed after the digestion order has progressed to the change of the third hold at the execution time (starting prize time) of the stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing data STC10 has 25 (0 to 24) production random values 19 and the stage change timing data STC11 has 25 (25 to 49) production random values 19. Twenty-five (50 to 74) effect random values 19 are associated with the STC12, and 25 (75 to 99) effect random values 19 are associated with the stage change timing data STC13.

The options corresponding to the four hold numbers include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, STC13, and STC14. The stage change timing data STC14 indicates that the stage is changed after the fluctuation digestion has progressed to the fluctuation of the fourth hold at the execution time (starting prize time) of the stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing data STC10 contains 20 (0 to 19) production random values 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 contains 20 (20 to 39) production random values 19. The STC12 has 20 (40 to 59) production random values 19, the stage change timing data STC13 has 20 (60 to 79) production random values 19, and the stage change timing data STC14 has 20 production random values. Twenty (80 to 99) effect random values 19 are associated with each other.

In step S1623-10, the sub CPU 120a generates stage data of the new stage according to the determination of the new stage determination process and the stage change timing determination process, and stores the stage data in the corresponding storage unit of the effect information storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a is the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area when the stage is changed in the fluctuation, and the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area when the stage is changed in the fluctuation of the first hold. When the stage is changed due to the fluctuation of the second hold, the second storage unit of the first effect information storage area is used, and when the stage is changed due to the change of the third hold, the third storage unit of the first effect information storage area is used. When the stage is changed due to the change of the fourth hold, the fourth storage unit of the first effect information storage area is set as the data storage destination, and the stage data of the new stage is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination. Here, when the storage destination of the stage data is any of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area, the stage data stored in the storage unit is stored in the storage area shift process (S1641 in FIG. 90). Each time, it is shifted to the previous storage unit.

117, 118, and 119 are flowcharts showing the details of the stage change notice effect selection process (step S1625 of FIG. 90). In FIG. 117, the sub CPU 120a has decided in the stage change timing determination process (step S1623-9 in FIG. 113) to change the stage due to the fluctuation, or to change the stage due to the fluctuation in the hold. Is confirmed (S1625-1). When the sub CPU 120a changes the stage due to the change (S1625-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the stage change notice effect selection process this time. When the stage is changed due to the fluctuation in the hold (S1625-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-2.

In step S1625-2, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change notice effect execution determination process. In the stage change notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the stage change notice effect is executed based on the effect random number value 20.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stage change notice effect execution determination table. In the stage change notice effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random value 20 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored. Specifically, 20 (0 to 19) effect random values 20 are associated with data indicating that the stage change notice effect is executed, and 80 (20 to 99) effect random values 20 are associated with each other. Is associated with data indicating that the stage change notice effect is not executed.

In step S1625-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1625-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625-4. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1625-3: No), the stage change notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1625-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the stage change notice standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the stage change notice wait flag storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step S1625-5. The stage change notice waiting flag is a flag indicating that the stage change notice effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1625-5, the sub CPU 120a performs the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process. The stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is a process of determining at what timing the stage change notice effect is to be performed. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 21 updated in step S1100. In the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines in the stage change timing determination process (S1623-9 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process. The stage change timing is determined based on the stage change execution timing and the effect random value 21.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stage change notice effect execution timing determination table. In the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 21 and the stage change notice effect execution timing data is stored for each item corresponding to the stage change execution timing.

When the execution timing of the stage change is in the variable display of the first hold, there are stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, and SCY13. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY12 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately before the stop of the variable display of the first hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY13 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the change display of the first hold is stopped. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 21. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY12 and SCY13 are not associated with any effect random value 21.

When the execution timing of the stage change is in the variable display of the second hold, there are stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, and SCY23. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY21 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY22 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately before the stop of the variable display of the second hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY23 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the second hold variable display is stopped. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY12 contains 34 (0 to 33) effect random values 21, and the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY13 contains 33 (34 to 66) effect random values 21. However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random values 21 are associated with the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY21. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23 are not associated with any effect random value 21.

When the stage change execution timing is in the variable display of the third hold, there are stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY32, and SCY33. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY31 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY32 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately before the stop of the variable display of the third hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY33 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the third hold variable display is stopped. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY22 contains 34 (0 to 33) effect random values 21, and the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY23 contains 33 (34 to 66) effect random values 21. However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random values 21 are associated with the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY31. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33 are not associated with any effect random value 21.

When the stage change execution timing is in the variable display of the fourth hold, the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY32, SCY33, SCY41, SCY42, And SCY43. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY41 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the fourth hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY42 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately before the stop of the variable display of the fourth hold. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY43 indicates that the stage change notice effect is executed immediately after the change display of the fourth hold is stopped. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY32 contains 34 (0 to 33) effect random values 21, and the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY33 contains 33 (34 to 66) effect random values 21. However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random values 21 are associated with the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY41. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43 are not associated with any effect random value 21.

Here, in this table, when the stage is changed during the variable display of the first hold, the selection rate of the notice effect execution timing data SCY11 in which the execution timing of the stage change notice effect is immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold. Is 100%, and the selection rate of the other notice effect execution timing data SCY12 and 13 is 0%.

Further, when the stage is changed during the variable display of the second hold, the advance notice effect execution timing data SCY12, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately before the stop of the change display of the first hold one before the digestion order, The notice effect execution timing data SCY13, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the stop of the variable display of the first hold, and the notice effect execution timing, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the start of the change display of the second hold. The selection rate of the data SCY21 is 33% to 34%, and the selection rate of the other advance notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23 is 0%.

In addition, when the stage is changed during the variable display of the third hold, the advance notice effect execution timing data SCY22, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately before the stop of the change display of the second hold, which is one before the digestion order, The notice effect execution timing data SCY23, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the stop of the variable display of the second hold, and the notice effect execution timing, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the start of the change display of the third hold. The selection rate of the data SCY31 is 33% to 34%, and the selection rate of the other advance notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33 is 0%.

Further, when the stage is changed during the variable display of the 4th hold, the advance notice effect execution timing data SCY32, which sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately before the stop of the variable display of the 3rd hold, which is one before the digestion order, The notice effect execution timing data SCY33 that sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the stop of the variable display of the third hold, and the notice effect execution timing that sets the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately after the start of the change display of the fourth hold. The selection rate of the data SCY41 is 33% to 34%, and the selection rate of the other notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43 is 0%.

With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 is determined to execute the stage change in the stage change execution determination process (S1623-5 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process triggered by the start winning, and thereafter. When the execution of the stage change advance notice effect is determined in the stage change advance notice effect execution determination process (S1625-2 in FIG. 117) in the stage change advance notice effect selection process, the change display is larger than the variable display in which the stay change is scheduled to be executed. Immediately after the start of the previous variation display in the digestion order, it is restricted that the effect suggesting that the stage change changes in the next variation display of the variation display is executed as the stage change notice effect. In this case, the effect control board 120 undergoes a stage change in the next variation display of the variation display immediately before or immediately after the stop display of the variation display whose digestion order is earlier than the variation display in which the stay change is scheduled to be executed. It is possible to perform a production that suggests a change as a stage change notice production.

In step S1625-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold. If the timing data SCY11 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-7. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-9.

In step S1625-7, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. The stage change notice standby counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the stage change notice effect is executed. In the next step S1625-8, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately after the start of the fluctuation is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change notice effect is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-9, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold. If the timing data SCY12 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold (S1625-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-10. If it is not immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold (S1625-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-12.

In step S1625-10, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-11, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately before the change stop is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change notice effect is immediately before the stop of the change display. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-12, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold. If the timing data SCY13 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold (S1625-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-13. If it is not immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the first hold (S1625-12: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-14.

In step S1625-13, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice effect selection process is completed without setting any timing flag.

In step S1625-14, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold. If the timing data SCY21 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold (S1625-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-15. If it is not immediately after the start of the variation display of the second hold (S1625-14: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-17.

In step S1625-15, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-16, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-17, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the second hold. If the timing data SCY22 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the second hold (S1625-17: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-18. If it is not immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the second hold (S1625-17: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-20.

In step S1625-18, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-19, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-20, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the variable display of the second hold. If the timing data SCY23 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the second hold (S1625-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-21. If it is not immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the second hold (S1625-20: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-22 of FIG.

In step S1625-21, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice effect selection process is completed without setting any timing flag.

In step S1625-22 of FIG. 119, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold. If the timing data SCY31 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold (S1625-22: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-23. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold (S1625-22: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-25.

In step S1625-23, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-24, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-25, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold. If the timing data SCY32 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold (S1625-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-26. If it is not immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold (S1625-25: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-28.

In steps S1625-26, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-27, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In step S1625-28, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold. If the timing data SCY33 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold (S1625-28: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-29. If it is not immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold (S1625-28: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-30.

In steps S1625-29, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice effect selection process is completed without setting any timing flag.

In step S1625-30, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the variable display of the fourth hold. If the timing data SCY41 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the fourth hold (S1625-30: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-31. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the fourth hold (S1625-30: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-33.

In steps S1625-31, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-32, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In steps S1625-33, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the variable display of the fourth hold. If the timing data SCY42 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the fourth hold (S1625-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-34. If it is not immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the fourth hold (S1625-33: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-36.

In steps S1625-34, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-35, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice production selection process is completed.

In steps S1625-36, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change notice effect determined in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the variable display of the fourth hold. If the timing data SCY43 in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the fluctuation display of the fourth hold (S1625-36: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-37. If it is not immediately after the stop of the variable display of the fourth hold (S1625-36: No), the stage change notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In steps S1625-37, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice effect selection process is completed without setting any timing flag.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the details of the stage change notice effect control process (step S1669 of FIG. 92) during symbol change. In FIG. 122, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the stage change notice waiting flag (S1669-1). If the stage change notice standby flag is set in the stage change notice effect execution determination process (S1625-4 in FIG. 117) in the stage change notice effect selection process, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the stage change notice standby flag is set (S1669-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1669-2. If the stage change notice standby flag is not set (S1669-1: No), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is terminated.

In step S1669-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1669-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change. If the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1669-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-3.

In step S1669-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32, or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the fluctuation stop is selected in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change notice effect selection process, The determination result of this step is "Yes". If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1669-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-8. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1669-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-4.

In step S1669-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing data SCY11, SCY21, SCY31, or SCY41 of the execution timing immediately after the start of fluctuation is selected in the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change notice effect selection process, The determination result of this step is "Yes". If the timing data SCY13, SCY23, SCY33, or SCY43 of the execution timing immediately after the fluctuation stop is selected, the determination result of this step is "No". If the timing flag is set immediately after the start of fluctuation (S1669-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-5. If the timing flag is not set immediately after the start of the change (S1669-4: No), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is terminated.

In step S1669-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change based on the stage data in the effect information storage area, sets a character related to the new stage as an appearance character, and makes the character appear. Generate an effect pattern specification command for the advance notice effect, and set the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1669-6, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is completed.

In step S1669-8, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the predetermined timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, and sets the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds in the timer counter immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is completed. The timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop is counted down in the timer update process (S1500 in FIG. 89), and becomes 0 at a predetermined timing immediately before the fluctuation display is stopped.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1669-8, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately after the start of the fluctuation display) give a stage change notice effect to the image display device 31 and the audio output device. 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the details of the stage change notice effect control process (step S1672 in FIG. 93) while the symbol is stopped. In FIG. 123, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the stage change notice waiting flag (S1672-1). When the stage change notice standby flag is set (S1672-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-2. If the stage change notice standby flag is not set (S1672-1: No), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is terminated.

In step S1672-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1672-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-3. When the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1672-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-4.

In step S1672-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c by -1. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is terminated.

In step S1672-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. When the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1672-4: Yes), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is terminated. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1672-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-5.

In step S1672-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing flag is set immediately after the start of the change (S1672-5: Yes), the stage change effect control process during the current symbol change is terminated. If the timing flag is not set immediately after the start of fluctuation (S1672-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-6.

In step S1672-6, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change, sets a character related to the new stage as an appearing character, and generates and generates an effect pattern specification command for a stage change notice effect to make this character appear. Set the effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. In the next step S1672-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. After that, the mode effect control process this time is finished.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1672-6, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately after the fluctuation display is stopped) give a stage change notice effect to the image display device 31 and the audio output device. 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 124, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1). If the type of jackpot is 2R probability variation (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. If it is not a 2R probability variation (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 16R probability variation hit. If the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not a 16R probability variation (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is an 8R probability variation hit. If the type of jackpot is 8R probability variation (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. In the case of 8R normal hit (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the rank-up success effect, and executes the rank-up effect indicating that the rank-up success effect is executed in the round-specific effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a decides to perform the rank-up failure effect, and executes the rank-up effect indicating that the rank-up failure effect is executed in the round-specific effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

After executing step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 8R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the opening effect determined in steps S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the special game selection process this time is completed.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process (step S1693 of FIG. 93). In FIG. 125, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the receive buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2 when the round start command in the receive buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes). If it is a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1963-6.

In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the rank-up effect execution data is stored in the round-specific effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the rank-up effect execution data is stored in the sub CPU 120a (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. If the rank-up effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-6.

In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the rank-up effect execution data in the round-specific effect information storage area indicates the execution of the rank-up success effect or the execution of the rank-up failure effect. judge. When the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. When the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the rank-up success production standby flag in the rank-up production success standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1693-5. The rank-up success effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the rank-up success effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation reception valid period in the rank-up effect of this round (fourth round), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds. Set to the timer counter to start the operation reception valid period for the rank-up effect of. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception valid period in the rank-up effect of this round, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is the operation reception valid for the rank-up effect of the sub RAM 120c. Set to the period end timer counter. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the round effect of this round in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the details of the special training mode start control process (step S1697 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 126, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode execution flag is set in the special training mode execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1697-1). When the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1697-1: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1697-1. If the special training mode execution flag is set (S1697-1: Yes), step S1697-1 is skipped and the process proceeds to the next step S1697-1.

In step S1697-1, the sub CPU 120a sets the special training mode execution flag in the special training mode execution flag storage area. In the next step S1697-3, the sub CPU 120a sets 100 in the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1697-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the effect of the special training mode, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1697-4, the image display device 31, the image display device 31, displays an effect related to the display of the background image in the special training mode in the subsequent symbol variation effect. The audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the command.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing details of the live mode start control process (step S1698 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 127, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode execution flag is set in the special training mode execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1698-1). When the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1698-1: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the live mode start control process this time. If the special training mode execution flag is set (S1698-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1697-1.

In step S1698-2, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode execution flag in the special training mode execution flag storage area. In the next step S1698-3, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1698-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command for the live mode effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1698-4, the image display device 31, the image display device 31, displays an effect related to the display of the background image in the live mode in the subsequent symbol variation effect. The audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the command.

128, 129, and 130 are flowcharts showing the details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a performs the operation information storage area update process (S1701). The operation information storage area update process is a process for updating the information in the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

FIG. 131 (a) is a diagram showing an operation information storage area. FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the operation information storage area includes an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key. It has a sampling signal storage area, an effect button sampling signal storage area, an effect button on-edge storage area, an effect button off-edge storage area, an effect button off-edge number storage area, and an effect button on-off-edge signal number storage area. ..

The effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge number storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area each have the latest sampling timing information. It has a latest sampling storage unit that stores the information of the previous sampling timing and a pre-sampling storage unit that stores information on the sampling timing immediately before (2 milliseconds ago).

In the operation information storage area update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A. Further, the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Further, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Further, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. To do.

More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. If so, write 0 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

The sub CPU 120a supplies the information of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area to the pre-sampling storage unit. Copy each. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 131 (b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a If the input signal of is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on-edge signal storage area, and other combinations. If (pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 1, pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 0, or pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 0), the effect button on-edge signal storage area. Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off-edge signal storage area, and other combinations. If (pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 1, pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 0, or pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 1), the effect button off-edge signal storage area. Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

If 1 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the sub CPU 120a rewrites the number of the latest sampling storage units of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area to +1 to perform the effect button sampling. If 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage unit of the signal number storage area between the effect button on-off edge is reset to 0.

In step S1702 of FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag is set in the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703 when the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag is set (S1702: Yes). If the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag is not set (S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 of FIG. 129.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704 when the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes). If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 of FIG. 129.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and at the end time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 1 is not written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1710 of FIG. 129.

In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer instructing the progress of the dialogue operation effect to the operation result. Then, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1708.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1706, the operation result of the dialogue operation effect is produced (the dialogue speaker determination process in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process (FIG. FIG. The character determined in S1652-1) of 104 appears, and the dialogue determination process (the effect of speaking the dialogue determined in S1652-2 of FIG. 104) is performed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive device for effect. 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1708 of FIG. 129, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the challenge effect (success) standby flag is set in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the challenge effect (success) standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. If the challenge effect (success) standby flag is not set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the challenge effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period of the challenge effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the challenge effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the challenge effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the challenge effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1711: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. If 1 is not written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the first accessory descent standby flag is set in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1713 when the first accessory descent standby flag is set (S1712: Yes). If the first accessory descent standby flag is not set (S1712: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation designation command instructing the progress to the operation result in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1714.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1713, the challenge revival effect (operation of the first movable accessory 330a, display of the short hit notification effect image, and short hit notification). The effect) accompanied by the output of the effect sound is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1714, the sub CPU 120a clears the challenge effect (success) standby flag in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1715, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1716.

In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area. When the surprise operation effect standby flag is set (S1716: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. If the surprise operation effect standby flag is not set (S1716: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 of FIG.

In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the surprise operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step becomes "Yes". When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 of FIG.

In step S1718, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the surprise operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1718: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1719. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1718: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1719: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1720. If 1 is not written (S1719: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 of FIG.

In step S1720, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the first accessory descent standby flag is set in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the first accessory descent standby flag is set (S1720: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1721. If the first accessory descent standby flag is not set (S1720: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 of FIG.

In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command in the transmission buffer instructing the progress to the operation result of the surprise operation effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S1722.

In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a clears the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1723, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process proceeds to step S1724 of FIG.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1721, the operation result of the surprise operation effect is produced (the operation of the first movable accessory 330a, the display of the jackpot notification effect image, And the effect accompanied by the output of the jackpot notification effect sound) is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1724 of FIG. 130, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the rank-up effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period of the continuous hitting effect in the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step becomes "Yes". When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1725, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the rank-up effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1725: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1726. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held pressed) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held) for 1 second or longer, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than a predetermined value (S1726: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on-off edge is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1726: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. If 0 is written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S 1728, the sub CPU120a updates the pummel number _{N RD} of battered number storage area of the sub RAM120c by +1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1729.

In step S1729, the sub CPU120a determines whether battered number _{N RD} updated reaches 30. If the number of times the effect button 35 is pressed after the guidance image of "Continuous hit!" Is displayed reaches 30 times, the judgment result of this step is "Yes", and if it does not reach 30 times, this step The determination result is "No". Sub CPU120a, when repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has not reached 30 (S1729: No), the process proceeds to step S1730. If repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has reached 30 (S1729: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

In step S1730, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1734.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1730, the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 produce an effect of advancing the gauge extension amount of the gauge image to the right by a predetermined amount. , The effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1731, it is confirmed whether or not the rank-up success effect standby flag is set in the rank-up success effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The rank-up success production standby flag is set at the start of the fourth round game in the special game per 8R probability variation. When the rank-up success effect standby flag is set (S1731: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1732. If the rank-up success effect standby flag is not set (S1731: No), the process proceeds to step S1733.

In step S1732, the sub CPU 120a sets the rank-up failure effect designation command instructing the execution of the rank-up failure effect in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1735.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1732, the rank-up failure effect is output to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c. , And the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets the rank-up success effect designation command instructing the execution of the rank-up success effect in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1734.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1733, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c produce a rank-up success effect. , And the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a clears the rank-up effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1735, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer.

When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1729, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing details of the timer update process (step S1500 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 132, if there is a non-zero timer counter in the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a updates it by -1 (S1501).

In the next step S1502, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1502: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1503. When the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1502: No), the current timer update process is terminated.

In the next step S1503, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold at the time of execution of the stage change notice effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change notice effect selection process. Or, when the timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32, or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation of the fourth hold is selected, the stage notice effect control during the symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation digestion progresses to the fluctuation. It is set in the process (S1669-8 in FIG. 122). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1504 when the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1503: Yes). If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1503: No), the timer update process this time is terminated.

In the next step S1504, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c is 0. When the timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop is 0 (S1504: Yes) and when the imitation counter is not 0 (S1504: No), the current timer update process is terminated.

In the next step S1505, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change, sets a character related to the new stage as an appearance character, and generates and generates a production pattern specification command for a stage change notice effect that causes this character to appear. Set the effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. In the next step S1506, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change advance notice standby flag in the stage change advance notice standby flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately before the start of fluctuation. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is completed.

Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1505, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display) give a stage change notice effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the like. The effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

The above is the details of this embodiment. According to this embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the game machine 1 can be smoothly performed.

<Second Embodiment>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, the effect control board 120 has a variation display immediately before, immediately after the stop, and a stage change of the variation display immediately before the variation display for which the stage change is to be performed. The stage change notice production was to be executed at any timing immediately after the start of. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 has a stage change notice effect suggesting that the stage change is performed in the variation display only at the timing immediately after the start of the variation display in which the stage is to be changed. Enables execution.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a stage change advance notice effect execution timing determination table referred to in the stage change advance notice effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change advance notice effect selection process. In the table of FIG. 133, when the stage is changed during the fluctuation display of the first hold, the selection rate of the timing data SCY12 and SCY13 other than the timing data SCY11 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the first hold is 0. %It has become. When the stage is changed during the variable display of the second hold, the selection rate of the timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY22, and SCY23 other than the timing data SCY21 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold is 0. %It has become. When the stage is changed during the variable display of the third hold, the timing data other than the timing data SCY31 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY32, The selectivity of SCY33 is 0%. When the stage is changed during the variable display of the 4th hold, the timing data other than the timing data SCY41 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the variable display of the 4th hold SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, The selectivity of SCY32, SCY33, SCY42, and SCY43 is 0%.

According to this embodiment, the execution of the stage change notice effect at a timing other than the timing immediately after the start of the variable display for which the stage change is to be performed is restricted. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the production accompanied by the stage change.

<Third Embodiment>
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b are different from those of the first and second embodiments.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the special command analysis process during setting change in FIG. 62. The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 134 are the setting change notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the special command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed in the setting change mode. The image is erased to make it invisible.

More specifically, in the record of the "full tank error command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". , The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of the "full tank error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a dish full tank error command. , Display the message image corresponding to the full plate error command in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the dish full tank error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the dish full tank error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again. Stops the output of the full-filled error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "door opening error command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "door opening error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a door opening error command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image. The door open error command and the corresponding message image are displayed in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the door opening error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the door opening error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the door opening error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again to make the door open. Stops the output of the release error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "magnet detection error command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of "Magnet detection error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image. The magnet detection error command and the corresponding message image are displayed in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the magnet detection error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again to make the magnet visible. Stops the output of the detection error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "power-on designation command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image. The message image corresponding to the power-on specification command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during startup.

In the record of the "power recovery designation command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power restoration designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image. Display the message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during startup.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the game command analysis process during setting change in FIG. 70. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 140 is the setting change notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the game command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed in the setting change mode. It is designed to maintain the display of the image.

More specifically, in the record of the "variation start command" in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 141, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the fluctuation start command, the image control board 150 has the setting change notification image on the image display device 31. The display of is maintained, and the change start command and the corresponding symbol change image are displayed on the character "Settings are being changed" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

In the record of the "starting prize designation command" in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 142, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the start prize designation command. Then, the display of the production image corresponding to the start prize designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the output of the production sound corresponding to the start prize designation command is regulated. That is, when the start prize designation command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed, the start prize designation command is ignored for the image display and the audio output.

In the record of the "special game start command (opening designation command)" in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 143, the image control board 150 is an image display device when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command). In 31, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained, and the special game start command (opening designation command) and the corresponding effect image are superimposed and displayed on the character "setting is being changed" in the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the production sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is output.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis process during setting confirmation in FIG. 77. The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 144 are the setting confirmation notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the special command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. The image is erased to make it invisible.

More specifically, in the record of the "full tank error command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased". , The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of the "full tank error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a dish full tank error command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image. , Display the message image corresponding to the full plate error command in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the dish full tank error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the dish full tank error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the dish full tank error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again. Stops the output of the full-filled error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "door opening error command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of "door opening error resolution command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the door opening error command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image. The door open error command and the corresponding message image are displayed in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the door opening error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the door opening error resolution command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the door opening error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again to make the door visible. Stops the output of the release error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "magnet detection error command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". In the record of "Magnet detection error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 147, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image. The magnet detection error command and the corresponding message image are displayed in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the magnet detection error command and the corresponding message voice are output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the magnet detection error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again to make the magnet visible. Stops the output of the detection error command and the corresponding message voice.

In the record of the "power-on designation command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the command received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image and turns on the power in the center of the screen. Display the message image corresponding to the specified command. Also, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during startup.

In the record of the "power recovery designation command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "with erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 149, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power restoration designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image. Display the message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during startup.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1 of the game command analysis process during setting confirmation in FIG. 84. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 150 is the setting confirmation notification regardless of whether the background music is stopped or not when the game command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. It is designed to maintain the display of the image.

More specifically, in the record of the "variation start command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the fluctuation start command, the image control board 150 has the setting confirmation notification image on the image display device 31. The display of is maintained, and the fluctuation start command and the corresponding symbol fluctuation image are displayed on the text "Setting confirmation in progress" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

In the record of the "starting prize designation command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command. The data indicating the display position of is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 152, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command. Then, the display of the production image corresponding to the start prize designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is maintained, and the output of the production sound corresponding to the start prize designation command is regulated. That is, when the start prize designation command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed, the start prize designation command is ignored for the image display and the audio output.

In the record of the "special game start command (opening designation command)" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure". The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop".

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 153, the image control board 150 is an image display device when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command). In 31, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained, and the special game start command (opening designation command) and the corresponding effect image are superimposed and displayed on the character "setting confirmation in progress" in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the special game start command (opening designation command) and the corresponding effect sound are output. According to this embodiment, the cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the game machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

<Fourth Embodiment>
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure for confirming the setting in the setting change mode is different from that in the first to third embodiments. In the first to third embodiments, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is the operation of confirming the jackpot lottery setting. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is confirmed by operating the setting key 177 and the RAM clear switch 174. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), when it is desired to confirm the setting, the setting key 177 is returned from the ON state to the OFF state, and the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed while the power switch 127 is in the OFF state. .. When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to "0002" in the example of FIG. 154 (B)) is confirmed as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability, and this The setting information of the setting is written in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the state shifts to the customer waiting state without going through the process of turning off the power. Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again without shifting from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state.

<Fifth Embodiment>
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal configuration of the cover 119 of the main control board 110 is different from that of the first to fourth embodiments (FIG. 23). As shown in FIG. 156, in the present embodiment, there are a RAM clear switch 174, a setting switch 175, and a monitor 178 inside the cover 119 on the main control board 110. The setting switch 175 is an operating means that serves as a substitute for the setting key 177 in the first to fourth embodiments.

The procedure of the normal start operation, the RAM clear start operation, the first special start operation, and the second special start operation in the present embodiment is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the normal start-up operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the normal start operation is performed, the game machine 1 restores the data in the main RAM 110c in the initialization process, and performs the normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the RAM clear start operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear start operation is performed, the game machine 1 clears the main RAM 110c in the initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed, performs the normal mode process.

As shown in FIG. 159 (A), in the first special start operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the first special activation operation is performed, the game machine 1 performs a setting change mode process in the initialization process.

As shown in FIG. 159 (B), when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability in the setting change mode, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Each time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically in the order of "0002"-> "0003"-> "0004"-> "0005"-> "0006"-> "0001". If you want to confirm the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, turn off the power switch 172.

As shown in FIG. 160, in the second special start operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the second special activation operation is performed, the game machine 1 performs a setting confirmation mode process in the initialization process.

<Sixth Embodiment>
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure for confirming the setting in the setting change mode is different from that in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is an operation of confirming the jackpot lottery setting. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is confirmed by operating the setting switch 175. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), when it is desired to confirm the setting, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, the power switch 127 is kept on, and the setting switch 175 is pressed. When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to "0002" in the example of FIG. 161 (B)) is confirmed as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability, and this The setting information of the setting is written in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the state shifts to the customer waiting state without going through the process of turning off the power. Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for changing the setting, and pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for confirming the setting, and the transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is performed. Instead of doing so, the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again.

<7th Embodiment>
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the operation of changing the setting and the operation of confirming the setting in the setting change mode are opposite to those of the sixth embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for changing the setting, and pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for confirming the setting, and after this confirmation operation, a customer waiting state is established. Move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for changing the setting, and pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for confirming the setting, and the transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is performed. Instead of doing so, the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again.

<8th Embodiment>
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the special command analysis process (FIG. 62) during setting change is different from that of the first to seventh embodiments. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 165 are set change notification when a specific special command (magnet detection error command and vibration detection error command) is received while the setting change notification image is displayed. When the image is deleted and a special command other than a specific special command is received, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

Specifically, in the records of the "magnet detection error command" and the "vibration detection error command" in the table of FIG. 165, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", indicating the necessity of erasing the image. The data is "erased". In other records, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure".

<9th embodiment>
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the game command analysis process (FIG. 70) during setting change is different from that of the first to eighth embodiments. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 166 is that when a specific game command (variation start command and opening designation command) is received while the setting change notification image is displayed, the setting change notification image is displayed. When it is erased and a special command other than a specific game command is received, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

Specifically, in the records of the "variation start command" and the "opening designation command" in the table of FIG. 166, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is. It says "with erasure". In other records, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure".

<10th Embodiment>
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis process (FIG. 77) during setting confirmation is different from that of the first to ninth embodiments. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 167 are set confirmation notification when a specific special command (magnet detection error command and vibration detection error command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. When the image is deleted and a special command other than a specific special command is received, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

Specifically, in the records of the "magnet detection error command" and the "vibration detection error command" in the table of FIG. 167, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", indicating the necessity of erasing the image. The data is "erased". In other records, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure".

<11th Embodiment>
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1 of the game command analysis process (FIG. 84) during setting confirmation is different from that of the first to tenth embodiments. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. The contents of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 168 show the setting confirmation notification image when a specific game command (variation start command and opening designation command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. When it is erased and a special command other than a specific game command is received, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

Specifically, in the records of the "variation start command" and the "opening designation command" in the table of FIG. 167, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is It says "with erasure". In other records, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure".

Although the first to eleventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the following modifications may be added to such embodiments.
(1) The first to eleventh embodiments described above are applications of the present invention to a pachinko gaming machine. However, the present invention may be applied to slot machines.

(2) In S1146-6, S1147-6, S1156-6, and S11157-6 in the first to eleventh embodiments, the erasure designation command for instructing the erasure of the displayed image (setting change notification image, setting confirmation notification image) Instead of, a command may be set to instruct to draw another image such as a single color image on the layer above the drawing layer of the display image. As long as the command can make the displayed image invisible, a command for instructing the deletion of the displayed image itself may be sent, or a command for instructing the display image to overwrite another image may be sent. ..

(3) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the display position of the message image corresponding to the command when the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the sub CPU 120a during the display of the setting change notification image or the setting confirmation notification image. Was either in the center of the screen or in the upper right corner of the screen. However, the display position of the message image may be the lower right corner, the upper left corner, or the lower left corner.

(4) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the first special activation operation is performed, a setting change command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting is set with the transmission of the setting change command as an opportunity. Change The change image was displayed. Further, when the second special start operation is performed, the setting confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting confirmation notification image is displayed when the setting confirmation command is transmitted. It was. However, when the first special start operation or the second special start operation is performed, the setting change command and the setting confirmation command are prevented from being transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. During that time, the game standby image (FIG. 57) may continue to be displayed. Further, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received while displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined command, the image corresponding to the predetermined command may not be visible. Further, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received while displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined command, the display of the image corresponding to the predetermined command may be maintained.

(5) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the record corresponding to the received command in the command execution mode determination table indicates that the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is "○", and the necessity of erasing the image is indicated. If the data is "no erasure" and the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the data is received in such a way that some characters of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image can be seen. The command and the corresponding message image were superimposed and displayed. However, the received command and the corresponding message image may be superimposed and displayed in such a manner that the characters of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image are completely hidden. In short, the reception command and the corresponding image may be superimposed and displayed on at least a part of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image.

(6) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, the missed notice effect is executed with a predetermined probability only when the jackpot determination result is a loss. On the other hand, the missed notice effect may be executed as a part of the so-called contradiction effect. In this modified example, it is likely to be confirmed in the loss mode such as the loss reach effect (the effect of setting the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R to the reach mode and then temporarily stopping in the loss mode), the challenge failure effect, and the battle failure effect. Only when the jackpot notification effect is executed after the surprise operation effect, which is the revival effect, is executed after the effect, the loss notice effect may be executed with a predetermined probability.

According to this modification, even when the missed notice effect is executed, there is a very low probability that the loss notification effect does not proceed as it is, but the jackpot notification effect proceeds through the surprise operation effect. Therefore, even when the shift notice effect is executed, the game can proceed without impairing the expectations of the player.

(7) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, the dialogue of "..." is not selected when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and the operation result of "..." is selected from the operation promotion effect. The effect of proceeding to is a loss notice effect for notifying that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are confirmed (completely stopped) in a loss mode. On the other hand, the loss notice effect that proceeds from the operation promotion effect to the line of "..." may be executed as a part of the so-called contradiction effect. In this modification, after the loss notice effect of proceeding from the operation promotion effect to the operation result of "...", the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the lost mode, the challenge failure effect, and the battle. Only when the jackpot notification effect is executed after executing the effect that is likely to be confirmed in a lost manner such as the failure effect, and then the surprise operation effect that is the revival effect is executed, from the operation promotion effect, "... The effect of proceeding to the operation result of "・" may be executed.

According to this modification, even when the effect in which the line "..." appears is executed, the effect may proceed to the jackpot notification effect through the surprise operation effect without proceeding to the loss notification effect as it is. Therefore, even when the effect of the appearance of the line "..." is executed, the game can be advanced without impairing the expectations of the player.

(8) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, the modes of stopping before the determination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R during the variable display of the symbols are all temporary stops (stops while slightly shaking). there were. However, the reach effect may be an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are completely stopped in the reach mode and then re-variated before the determination is made during the variation display of the symbols. Further, the effect of completely stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in a lost mode and then re-variating may be a lost temporary stop effect.

(9) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, the live mode (a special mode that shifts when a probability variation hit is won) is continued until the jackpot is won again. However, the live mode may be continued until the jackpot is won again or the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches a predetermined number without winning the jackpot.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, when it is determined to execute the stage change in the fluctuation at the time of execution of the stage change execution determination process (at the time of starting winning), the stage change notice effect execution determination process The stage change notice production was never executed without proceeding to. However, in the fluctuation, even when the stage change is executed, the stage change notice effect may be executed before that. In this case, it is preferable to execute the stage change notice effect for notifying the stage change in the change only immediately after the start of the change.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, a fluctuation start command and a magnet are used as operation check commands generated by a debug-dedicated board, a factory-shipped board, or an inspection personal computer and transmitted to the effect control board 120. I gave a command for detection. However, the commands generated by the debug board, factory-shipped board, or personal computer for inspection are the symbol specification command, special symbol hold number specification command, fluctuation stop command, customer waiting specification command, start prize specification command, and round start command. , Opening specification command, ending specification command, game state specification command, power-on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power recovery specification command, full tank error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, no ball error command , Payout excess error command, payout command error command, door open error command, switch unconnected error command, abnormal winning error command, discharge error command, vibration detection error command, dish full tank error resolution command, counter case error resolution command, counting switch Disconnection error resolution command, ballless error resolution command, payout excess error resolution command, payout command error resolution command, door open error resolution command, switch disconnection error resolution command, abnormal winning error resolution command, discharge error resolution command, magnet detection error It may be one or more of the resolution command and the vibration detection error resolution command. In this case, the effect control board 120 regardless of whether the command is generated by the main control board 110, the debug board, the factory-shipped board, or the inspection personal computer. The same process should be performed.

(11) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, when the power-on designation command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed while maintaining the characters during the setting change. Whether to stop the output of the background music during startup (Fig. 67), erase the characters being changed and display the message image corresponding to the power-on specification command, and maintain the output of the background music during startup (Fig. 67). It was either of FIG. 138). However, the character whose setting is being changed may be maintained, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command may be displayed, and the output of the background music during startup may be stopped. In short, it is possible to end all the processing before receiving the power-on designation command and redo the processing corresponding to the power-on designation command.

(12) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, when the power-on designation command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed while maintaining the characters during the setting confirmation. Whether to stop the output of the background music during startup (Fig. 82), or to erase the characters being changed and display the message image corresponding to the power-on specification command to maintain the output of the background music during startup (Fig. 82). It was either of FIG. 148). However, the characters for which the setting is being confirmed may be maintained, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command may be displayed, and the output of the background music during startup may be stopped. In short, it is possible to end all the processing before receiving the power-on designation command and redo the processing corresponding to the power-on designation command.

1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... 1st start port, 14a ... 1st start port detection switch, 15 ... 2nd start port, 15a ... 2nd start port detection switch, 16 ... 1st big prize opening, 16a ... 1st prize opening detection switch, 17 ... 2nd prize opening, 17a ... 2nd prize opening detection switch, 20 ... 1st special symbol display device, 21 ... 2nd special symbol display device, 31 ... image display Device, 110 ... Main control board, 110a ... Main CPU, 110b ... Main ROM, 110c ... Main RAM, 120 ... Production control board, 120a ... Sub CPU, 120b ... Sub ROM, 120c ... Sub RAM, 150 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

A main control means that can execute each lottery including a jackpot lottery, control the progress of the game based on the lottery result, and generate a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game.
A production means that displays an image and outputs sound,
An effect control means that receives a command in the main control means, determines the control content of the effect means based on the received command, and controls the effect means according to this determination.
A gaming machine including an operation means for performing an operation related to the setting of the main control means.
Each of the main control means and the effect control means can operate independently when the power is turned on.
When the first condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the main control means shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting related to the lottery can be changed according to the operation of the operation means, and the power is turned on. If the second condition is satisfied when it is, moves to set capable setting confirmation mode confirmation relating to the lottery,
In the setting change mode, the setting of the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state can be changed, but the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state is common to each setting.
The effect control means causes the effect means to display an image corresponding to the setting change mode while the main control means is in the setting change mode, and the main control means is in the setting confirmation mode. Meanwhile, a means for displaying an image corresponding to the setting confirmation mode on the effect means is provided.
The effect control means is a special game start command regardless of whether or not the command received during the display of the image corresponding to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is a command generated by the main control means. If there is, the image corresponding to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in the effect means is maintained, and the image corresponding to the special game start command is superimposed on the image corresponding to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A game machine characterized by displaying.